人教版七年级下册英语导学案(全册)+英语下册教材分析

人教版七年级下册英语导学案(全册)+英语下册教材分析

人教版七年级下册 英语导学案(全册)+英语下册教材分析 人教版七年级下册英语导学案(全册) Unit 1 Can you play the guitar? Section A 1a — 1c (P1) * 教师寄语：Never do things by halves. 做事不要半途而废。 【学习目标】： 1. 掌握表示爱好的单词． 2．熟练的谈论表示能力的话题，以及自己的意愿． 【学习重点】： 学会谈论自己或别人的能力. 【体验学习】： 1. 情态动词 can 小结：后面总是接动词原形，没有人称和数的变化。意思是“能,会”。 用法口诀：情态 can 表能力，和行为动词不分离。 不管主语如何变，can 的模样永不变。 只要出现动词 can，动词原形后面站。 一般疑问 can 提前，否定 can 后 not 添。 2. play 的用法小结： play 与体育、棋类词语连用时，不加定冠词 the eg: play basketball, play chess, play cards play 与乐器类词语连用时要加定冠词 the eg: play the guitar，play the piano play the drum，play the violin 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一、认读并书写本课单词 1，个人自读，记忆单词，小组互相检查读写情况 2. 默写下列单词并展示。 弹吉他__________ 跳舞_________游泳__________ 唱歌_________ 下国际象棋______ 画画_________ 说英语______________________ 3.小组内核对答案 4.完成 1a 将单词与图画匹配 学习任务二、学会谈论自己的能力并询问他人的能力。 1.听录音完成 1b 排序。 2.理解并复述听力对话并和你的伙伴编新对话。 3.完成 1c, 练习下面的对话： Can you---? Yes, I can. No, I can’t 学习任务三、合作探讨 1.试翻译以下短语，并讨论有什么不同？ 弹吉他__________________ 踢足球___________________ 2.讨论如何询问第三人称能力的句型 ---Can he sing? ---Yes, he can. / No, he can't. ---Can Tom speak English? ---Yes, he can. / No, he can't. 【自主检测】： I．精挑细选 1. Can you ________ English? A. speak B. talk C. say 2. Can he __________ basketball? A. play B. plays C. playing 3. My brother want _______ the chess club. A. join B. to join C. joins 4. Mary can play the chess________ she can't swim. A. and B. or C. but 5. His brother plays _______ piano every day. A. / B. a C. the II．翻译官 说英语_____________ 弹吉他_____________ 象棋俱乐部__________ 下象棋______________ 英语俱乐部_____________ 音乐俱乐部__________ 美术俱乐部___________ 游泳俱乐部_____________ 参加 ___________ Ⅲ. 补全对话 A. Can you ___________(唱歌)? B. Yes, I ________. Can you _________(游泳)? A. No, I want to join _______________(象棋俱乐部). B. I don't like ______________(象棋) A. What club do you want to __________? B. I want to join __________________(游泳俱乐部) 【快乐链接】 英汉对对碰：Match each word with the right Chinese meaning. guitar 游泳 sing 吉他 swim 跳舞 dance 画画 draw 唱歌 chess 说、说话 speak 国际象棋 join 说英语 club 参加、加入 speak English 俱乐部、社团 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 1 Can you play the guitar? Section A 2a— 2d (P2) * 教师寄语：Never do things by halves. 做事不要半途而废。 【学习目标】： 1.掌握并运用各种俱乐部的短语。 2.学会谈论自己的喜好和意愿及表达自己在某一方面所具备的才能。 3.通过小组一起谈论彼此的特长和爱好，培养一种群体意识。 【学习重点】： 能表达自己在某一方面所具备的才能及喜好与意愿。 【体验学习】： 1. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑 2. 熟悉俱乐部名称的写法: the swimming club____________ the dancing club__________________ the singing club_______________ the music club____________________ the art club___________________ the story telling club_______________ the chess club_________________ the sports club____________________ 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一： 熟练掌握各种俱乐部名称。 1.听录音，在 2a 中圈出你所听到的俱乐部。 2.再听一遍录音,自己核实答案。 3.小组相互核对答案，检查所听结果。 4.小组为单位，谈论自己的喜好和意愿。 eg： A:What club do you want to join? B:I want to join the chess club. 5.小组展示。 学习任务二：听 2b 录音,运用情态动词 can 谈论自己在某方面所具备的才能。 1.听录音，完成句子。 2.再听一遍录音,自己核实答案。 3.小组相互核对答案，检查所听结果。 4.小组为单位，谈论别人的喜好和意愿。 eg: A:What club does Lisa want to join? B:She wants to join the chess club. 学习任务三：完成 2c 部分。 1.以小组为单位,根据 2b 内容编新对话. 2.小组竞赛,展示新对话。 学习任务四：完成 2d 部分。 1.要求学生边读对话边翻译。 2.学生质疑，师生共同解惑。 3.教师领读或听录音带跟读课文。 4. 学生大声朗读并背诵课文。 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. My sister is good _____ math, she is great. A. in B. at C. to 2. Bob ______ to join the art club. A. want B. wants to C. wants II、完美呈现 1. John wants to j____ the music club. 2. Can you s______English? 3. I can play the guitar but can’t play the p________. Ⅲ、连词成句（请注意大小写和标点符号） 1. want, join, the, club, to, music, I (.) ___________________________________________________________ 2. I, play, the, can’t, guitar (.) ___________________________________________________________ 3. club, you, do , want, join, to, what (?) ___________________________________________________________ IV、补全对话 A: Good morning!___________________? B: Yes, I want to join the chess club. A: Good, _________________________ ? B: David. A: ___________________________ ? B: I’m twelve. A: ___________________________ ? B: My telephone number is 435-201. A: ___________________________ ? B: Yes, a little. A: Here is a card, please fill it out. B: Thank you. A: You’re welcome. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 1 Can you play the guitar? Section A Grammar Focus— 3c (P3) * 教师寄语：Never do things by halves. 做事不要半途而废。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1. 进一步熟悉情态动词 can 的用法。 2 .学会写海报。 【体验学习】： 1.根据音标拼读单词并牢记； write ______ show ______ or ______talk ______talk to _______kung fu ______ 2.自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一：运用前面所学的知识编写对话。 eg: ---- Can you swim ? ------ No, I can’t. -----Can you play chess? ------ Yes, I can. ------What club do you want to join? ------ I want to join the chess club. 学习任务二：完成 Grammar Focus 1. 学生自学，并知道 can’t = cannot. 2. 分组朗读句子。 3. 学生质疑，师生共同解惑。 学习任务三：完成 3a 部分 1. 学生仿照例句完成其他练习。 2. 小组相互核对答案。 3. 分组朗读句子。 学习任务四：完成 3b 部分 1. 以小组为单位，学生用所给的词完成海报空格。 2. 小组相互核对答案。 3. 以小组为单位，讨论海报的写法。 学习任务五：完成 3c 部分 【合作交流】： Group work: 讨论情态动词的用法。 情态动词有人称和数的变化吗?也就是说动词需要进行变化吗? He/She/I/You/They can ______________(sing). 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. We want students _________ the school show. A. to B. for C .on 2. ----Can you play volleyball? ------Sorry, I ____________ A. don’t B. can C. can’t 3. ----- Can you sing? ------Yes, I can sing very _________ A. good B. well C. nice 4. Kate wants ______ the English club. A. to join B. join C. to 5. ----- Can your brother sing? ------ __________ A. Yes, I can. B. No, you can’t. C. Yes, he can. II、短语翻译 1. 讲故事 _ 2.踢足球 _ _ 3. 放学后 4. 与…交谈 _ 5. 说汉语 _ 6.想要做某事 Ⅲ、完成句子 1. 你会跳舞吗? 是的,我会. _________________________________________________________ 2. 我会弹吉他, __________________________________________________________ 3. —你想加入什么俱乐部? —我想加入英语俱乐部. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 4. —你会下象棋吗? —不,我不会. ___________________________________________________________ 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 1 Can you play the guitar? Section B 1a — 1f (P4) * 教师寄语：Kind words are the music of the world.善言是世间的音乐。 【学习目标】: 1. 掌握有关乐器的单词． 2．学会询问某人能力的句型． 【学习重点】： 学会谈论自己或别人的能力. 【体验学习】： 翻译： 你会打篮球吗？ 不，我不会 你会敲鼓吗？ 是的，我会 根据上面两句话，讨论一下 play 的用法. 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一: 认读并书写本课单词 1.个人自读，记忆单词． 2.小组互相检查读、写情况． 3 .写出下列单词并展示． 吉他_____________ 鼓_____________ 钢琴_____________ 小提琴_____________ 画画____________ 唱歌_____________ 4.在小组内核对答案. 5.完成 1a 将单词与图画匹配. 6. 听录音，完成 1b. 学习任务二: 学会询问他人的能力句型 . ---- Can you play the guitar? ---- Yes, I can. But I can't play the piano. 1.两人一组，练习对话 2.利用 1a 中的乐器，做替换练习， 完成 1c. 3.小组竞争，展示成果 学习任务三: 学习 1d,1e,1f 部分 1. 听录音，圈出你听到的单词和短语 2. 核对答案，完成 1d 3. 再听一遍录音，用 1d 方框中的词填写 1e 图表 4. 核对答案，完成 1e. 5. 根据 1d,1e 内容，编写对话并上台展示，完成 1f 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. Bob can play________ basketball but can't play______ violin. A. the, the B. the, / C. /, the 2. Can he ______ it in English? A. speak B. speaks C. say 3. I like _____club. A. music B. the music’s C. the music 4. Tom wants to join _____club. A. dancing B. the danceing C. the dancing 5. He_____ to join the music club. A. don’t want B. doesn’t wants C. would like 6. ------Are they good at ____? ------Yes, they are. A. swim B. to swim C. swimming II、完美呈现 1. Can you play the v____________? 2. He can d_____________ and sing. 3. I want to join the art c___________. 4. Does he play the p__________ every day? 5. He can p ___ _ the drums. III 翻译句子 1. 你会唱歌吗? 是的,我会. _________________________________________________________ 2. 我不会弹钢琴，但是我会跳舞. _________________________________________________________ 3.他会弹吉他吗？不，他不会 _________________________________________________________ 4.Jane 会下象棋吗? 不,不会.她会拉小提琴 _________________________________________________________ 【快乐链接】 英汉对对碰：Match each word with the right Chinese meaning. violin 鼓 drum 小提琴 piano 钢琴 play the drums 拉小提琴 play the piano 击鼓 play the violin 弹钢琴 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 1 Can you play the guitar? Section B 2a — 2c (P5) * 教师寄语：Kind words are the music of the world.善言是世间的音乐。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1.掌握本节课的单词和短语。 2.理解本课短文，学会书写应聘广告. 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 找出新单词和短语并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 也,而且_________________ 2. 人，人们________________ 3. 老人院_______________ 4. 对……有办法 ___________ 5. 讲故事___________________ 6. 交朋友__________________ 7. 在某方面帮助某人 ___________ 8. 说英语的_______________ 9. 运动中心 ___________________ 10. 在周末_______________ 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一: 学习 2a 部分 1.自读短文, 理解意思并划出 Peter, Alan and Ma Huan 能做的事情。 2.学生质疑，师生共同解惑，注意区分 also 和 too 的用法。 3.小组内复述、背诵短文。 学习任务二: 学习 2b 部分 1.自读短文, 理解意思并把方框里的 A、B、C 填到相应的短文上。 2.小组合作, 翻译短文。 3.学生质疑，师生共同解惑。 4.尝试背诵短文。 学习任务三: 学习 2c 部分 结合 2a,2b 的内容，把短文前面的 A、B、C 填到相应的名字后的横线上 学习任务四：合作交流 Group work: 讨论如何写应聘广告，试着写一写。 _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. -----Can you help me ______ my English? -----Sure. A. in B. of C. with 2. ------_______ club do you want to join? ------ We want to join the tennis club. A. Why B. Where C. What 新-课 -标- - 一-网 3. Please call Mr.Wang _______ 010-88834567. A. in B. at C. with 4. Jim likes English and he ______ likes Chinese. A. too B. also C. two 5. Are you good ______ old people? A. at B. for C. with 6. I often do my homework ______ the weekends A. on B. for C. with II、翻译句子 1. 我能说英语而且也能踢足球。 ____________________________________________________________ 2. 你擅长与老年人交往吗？ ____________________________________________________________ 3. 我们需要你去帮助讲英语的学生的体育。 ____________________________________________________________ 【快乐链接】 英汉对对碰：Match each word with the right Chinese meaning. also 人们 people 而且 teach 家 home 中心 center 教 story 有趣的 interesting 故事 on the weekends 在…帮助 after school 在周末 help with 讲英语的 English-speaking 放学后 talk to 讲故事 tell a story 交朋友 make friends 与某人交谈 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 1 Can you play the guitar? Section B 3a — Self Check (P6) * 教师寄语：Kind words are the music of the world.善言是世间的音乐。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1. 复习掌握本单元的单词及短语。 2. 熟练运用本单元句型: 3. 学会书写应聘广告. 4. 了解和掌握相应的语音知识。 【体验学习】： * 小组讨论 may 和 can 的用法. may 和 can 都是 _____动词. 意思是________后面加_________. eg: can 表示一种能力。 他能说英语和汉语。 He _____speak __________and __________ may 表示允许， 可以。 我能知道你的名字吗？ _______ I __________your name? * 翻译： 1、他不会弹吉他。 ________________________________________ 2、我可以加入音乐俱乐部吗？ ______________________________________. 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一:：熟悉掌握本单元单词和短语。 1、自读并记忆单词 5 分钟。 2、组内练习，相互提问。 学习任务二：完成 3a 部分。 1．自读 3a 文章，用所给的词完成空格。 2．小组讨论, 理解广告内容。. 3．学生质疑，师生共同解惑. 学习任务三：完成 3b 部分。 学习任务四：完成 Self Check 部分。 1. 根据所学内容，尽可能的在方框里加些单词和短语。 2. 完成活动 2 3. 完成活动 3 学习任务五：了解和掌握相应的语音知识。 要求学生翻到教材 103 页，边听边跟读。 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. We want two good actors _______ our school show. A. for B. with C. in 2. Does your sister want _______ home? A. go B. to go to C. to go 3. Mr. Wang is ______ Chinese teacher. A. our B. us C. we 4. Is your friend a boy _____ a girl? A. and B. or C. but 5. Musicians ________ for School Music Festival. A. wants B. want C. wanted II、翻译官 1.说英语___________________ 2.学校音乐节_____________________ 3.弹吉他___________________ 4.击鼓___________________________ 5.游泳俱乐部_______________ 6.弹钢琴_________________________ 7.打鼓 ____________________ 8.下象棋_________________________ 9.be good with kids___________ 10.help kids with swimming___________ Ⅲ、补全对话 A: Hi, Liu Ying. _______ ________ do you want to join? B:I want to join the __________ ____________（象棋俱乐部）. A: Can you ____________? B: Yes, I can. I can paint ___________. Do you want to ______ the art club. A: No. I want to join the ________club. I can play _______ well. B: Really? Welcome to our club. A: _______________. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 2 What time do you go to school? Section A 1a — 1c (P7) * 教师寄语：No man can do two things at once. 一心不可二用。 【学习目标】： 1. 熟练掌握本课单词和短语． 2. 学会谈论自己及他人的日常生活及日常作息习惯,并能合理安排． 3. 初步掌握时间表达法. 【学习重点】： 谈论自己及他人的日常生活及日常作息习惯. 【体验学习】： 1. go to school 去上学（school 前不用冠词） 2. tooth (复数) 3.eat breakfast = have breakfast 吃早饭 4.take a shower = have a shower 洗澡，淋浴 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一：会读写新单词及短语。 1、个人自读、记忆本课单词。 2、小组互相检查单词读的情况。 3、小组内竞赛，看谁记得快、准，并展示（默写） 单词：时间______________ 几点,什么时候___________...点钟______________ 短语：通常______________ 去上学_________________ 起床_______________ 淋浴;洗澡__________ 吃早饭_________________ 刷牙 ______________ 4、认真观察１a 的图画，将词语与图片搭配，并核对答案。 学习任务二：利用时间表达法,自由的表达时间. 1、个人读出下列时间. 5:00 -- five o'clock 6:00 -- six o'clock 7:00 -- seven o'clock 8:00 -- eight o'clock 9:02 -- nine two 10:20 -- ten twenty 11:35 -- eleven thirty-five 2、小组为单位,读出 1a 中的时间. 3、听录音,完成活动 1b 学习任务三：完成 1c.运用句型 What time 谈论 Rick 的日常生活及 Rick 一家的淋浴时间. 1、熟读 1a 中的对话, 理解并复述. 2、两人合作, 谈论 Rick 的日常生活(分别扮演 Rick 和采访者). 3、熟读 1b 中的对话,理解并复述. 4、小组为单位,两人合作, 谈论 Rick 一家的淋浴时间. 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1．Do you often _______ TV? A. see B. watch C. look 2. ______ do you get up in the morning? A. Where B. What time C. How 3. When ______ Tom take a shower? A. does B. do C. has 4. What time does Ann ______ every day? A. go school B. go to the school C. go to school 5. -----What time is it ? ------It’s ______ 7:00. We often have breakfast ____7:00 A. at, at B. /, at C. at, / II、按要求改写句子. 1. Alicia takes a shower at 9:00.(提问划线部分) ______________________________________? 2. Mary takes a shower at 8:00.(变一般疑问句) _________ Mary ________ a shower at 8:00? 3. I usually go to bed at 10:00.(变否定句) I _______ usually _______to bed at 10:00. 4. She often runs in the morning.(对划线部分提问) ________ _________ she often _________? 5.I usually get up at five o’clock every day. (对划线部分提问) ________ _________ ________ you get up every day? 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 2 What time do you go to school? Section A 2a— 2d(P8) * 教师寄语：No man can do two things at once. 一心不可二用。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1. 熟练掌握本课单词和短语． 2. 学会谈论自己及他人的日常生活及日常作息习惯,并能合理安排． 【体验学习】： 用适当的词填空，补全下面的短文： My Day I usually _____ ____（起床）at 6:30. I have breakfast ______ (在) seven o’clock . After breakfast, I ______ ____ _____（洗澡）and then I ____ ___ ____（上学）at 7:30. I get to school at 7:40. I have five classes in the morning. And then I ______ _____ (吃午饭) at 12:00. In the afternoon, I have two classes. I ____ ______（回家）at 6:20. I get home at 6:30 p.m. I ______ _______（吃晚饭）at about 7:00. After dinner, I do my homework(做作业). I go to bed（睡觉） at 10:00. I am very busy（繁忙的） and happy every day. 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一：完成活动 2a 1.听录音，完成 2a 中的句子。 2.再听一遍录音,自己核实答案。 3.小组相互核对答案，检查所听结果。 4.小组为单位，谈论对话中的内容。 学习任务二：完成活动 2b。 1.听录音，完成时间表。 2.再听一遍录音,自己核实答案。 3.小组相互核对答案，检查所听结果。 4.小组为单位，谈论 2b 中的内容。 eg. A:What time does Bob take a shower? B:She takes a shower at 5:30. 学习任务三：完成 2c 部分。 1.以小组为单位, 编新对话。 2.小组竞赛,展示新对话。 学习任务四：完成 2d 部分。 1.要求学生边读对话边翻译。 2.学生质疑，师生共同解惑。 3.教师领读或听录音带跟读课文。 4. 学生大声朗读并背诵课文。 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. Scott has _____ interesting job. A. an B. a C. / 2. -----What's the time? -----__________ nine fifteen. A. This is B. It's C. At 3. That’s a funny time ______ breakfast! A. for B. in C. on II、根据汉语完成英语句子。 1. 我们从周一到周五上学。 We go to school ______ Monday _____ Friday. 2. 我穿好衣服后就吃饭。 After I ______ ________ , I have breakfast. 3. 她上课总是迟到。 She is always _______ _______ class. 【快乐链接】 英汉对对碰：Match each word with the right Chinese meaning. forty 从不，绝不 never 五十 early 四十 fifty 早的 work 电台，车站 station 工作 night 奇怪的 funny 晚上 exercise 广播电台 radio station 锻炼 in the morning 在早晨 get up 去上班 go to work 起床 be late for 淋浴 take a shower 迟到 go to school 去上学 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: __ Unit 2 What time do you go to school? Section A Grammar Focus — 3c (P9) * 教师寄语：No man can do two things at once. 一心不可二用。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1. 进一步掌握 what time 和 when 引导的疑问句 2. 掌握 usually, always never, on weekends 等词的用法。 【体验学习】： 1. 按要求写出下列单词的变换形式。 brush (第三人称单数) _________ good(最高级) __________ 2. what time 与 when 的区别 when 与 what time 都可以用来询问时间，相当于汉语的“什么时候”，它们之间的异同点 如下： 1）询问做某事的具体时间（钟点）时两者可以互换如：你什么时候去上学？ — When / What time do you go to school? — I go to school at seven o’clock. 2) 询问钟表所显示的时间时，只能用 what time e.g. —What time is it? (=What’s the time) 几点了? —It’s eight thirty.八点半。 3）询问事件发生的年份、月份、日期等非非钟点性时间时，只能用 when, 而不能用 what time。 e.g. —When is your birthday? —My birthday is February 6th. —When is Teachers’ Day? —It’s September 10th. [总结]: What time 几点了？准确到分，When 的范围比较大。 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一：完成 Grammar Focus 1. 学生自学，并理解句子意思。. 2．分组朗读句子。 3．学生质疑，师生共同解惑。（教师简介 usually, always never 的用法与区别） 4. 小组活动，运用 Grammar Focus 的句子编写对话。 学习任务二：完成 3a 部分 1.学生仿照例句完成其他练习。 2.小组相互核对答案。 3.分组朗读句子。 学习任务三：完成 3b 部分 1.学生用所给的词完成句子。 2.小组展示成果 学习任务四：完成 3c 部分 小组活动并展示成果 学习任务五：合作交流 Group work: 讨论如何使用 what time 及 when 并各造 2 个句子。 _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I．翻译官 1. 在周末 2. 去上班 _________ 3. 吃晚饭 4. 在六点半 II、根据汉语完成英语句子。 1. 你爸爸通常几点钟去上班？ ______ ______ _____ your father usually go to work ? 2. 他总是说而不做。 He is _______ telling, ________ doing. 3. 他们通常在周末锻炼。 They usually exercise ______ _________. 4. 你最好的朋友几点上学？ What time does your ______ ________ go to school? Ⅲ、连词成句 1. goes, he ,work ,to ,at ,o’clock, ten ,always (.) ___________________________________________________________ 2. get, dressed, do , they, time, what (?) ____________________________________________________________ 3. when, exercise, your, do, friends (?) . ____________________________________________________________ 4. do, get, you, on, up, school, time, days, what (?) _____________________________________________________________ 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 2 What time do you go to school? Section B 1a — 1e (P10) * 教师寄语：Time works wonders. 时间能创造奇迹。 【学习目标】： 1．熟练掌握本节课的单词及短语． 2．能够利用所学句型询问及表述时间。 3．掌握时间表达法 【学习重点】： 学会谈论自己或别人的日常生活，询问及表述时间。 【体验学习】： 1. 个人自读，找出并记忆新单词和短语． 2. 翻译官 在早晨____________ 在晚上____________ 在下午 去睡觉__________ 做作业____________ 去散步 六点半_____________ 六点一刻 六点四十五 __ 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一：完成活动 1a 部分. 1. 两人一组，练习对话。 ----What time do you usually go to bed? -----I usually go to bed at 9:45 2. 学生质疑，师生共同解惑。(介绍时间的表达方法) 3 . 完成 1a 将行为与时间匹配。 4. 在小组内核对答案。 学习任务二: 完成活动 1b 部分 1.两人一组，练习对话。 -----When do students usually eat dinner? -----Students usually eat dinner at a quarter to seven in the evening . 2.利用 1a 中的短语，做替换练习。 3.小组竞争，展示成果。 学习任务三: 完成 1c,1d,1e 部分 1. 听录音，圈出你听到的活动。 2. 核对答案，完成 1c， 3. 再听一遍录音，完成 1d, 4. 记住这些表示日常活动的动词和动词词组. 5. 听录音，复述所听内容 6. 两人一组，练习所听材料。完成 1e ------When does Tom usually get up ? -------He usually gets up at half past five. 学习任务四：合作交流 讨论时间的表达方法,并区分 past 与 to 的含义，试着翻译下列时间 4:15 ______________ 4:30 ________________ 4:45 __________________ 总结时间的表达法: 第一种方法：顺读法 先说点钟数，再说分钟数 第二中方法：倒读法 分钟+past / to +点钟数 ⑴分钟数不超过 30 分钟，中间用“past”连接，意为“过”， e.g. 8:29 twenty—nine past eight 八点过 29 分 ⑵分钟数超过 30 分钟，中间用“to”连接，意为“差---分到几点” e.g. 8:59 one to nine. 可翻译为 差一分到九点/九点差一分/8 点 59 分 ⑶ 15 分钟，表示为 a quarter eg: 9:15 -- a quarter past nine ⑷ 30 分钟，表示为 half 9:30 half past nine (30 分钟只用 past,不用 to) 注意：整点钟的表示方法只有一种，即钟点数 + o’clock eg: 8:00 -- eight o’clock 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. What time does Linda _______ after school? A. do her homework B. does her homework C. do her homeworks 2. They often have lunch _______ 12:00. A. in B. at C. on 3.When do you ________ every day? A. go to home B. go home C. go a home II、连词成句 1．go，mother，to, usually，at，eleven, bed，my ___________________________________________. 2． usually, go, he, to, when, work, do ___________________________________________? 3．plays，after，guitar，I，often，the，dinner ___________________________________________. 4．do，lunch，time，she，what, have ___________________________________________? 5．usually, people, does, breakfast, eat, when ___________________________________________? 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 2 What time do you go to school? Section B 2a — 2c (P11) * 教师寄语：Time works wonders. 时间能创造奇迹。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1. 掌握本节课的单词和短语。 2. 理解本课短文，并学会谈论自己或他人的健康生活方式。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 找出本节课的新单词和短语并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 早睡_________________ 2. 进行体育运动_______________ 3. 散步_________________ 4. 有时 ______________________ 5. 半小时_______________ 6. 或者…..或者________________ 7. 看电视_______________ 8. 对…..有益 _______________ 9. 品尝 _________________ 10. healthy(反义词)______________ 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一：谈论健康的日常活动 1. 分组讨论哪些是健康的日常活动，并展示 2. 完成 2a，并朗读这些短语 学习任务二：学习 2b 短文 1. 自读短文，理解意思 2. 小组讨论短文意思 3. 学生质疑，师生共同解惑, 教师对重点单词和短语作适当的解释。 4. 小组内复述短文 5. 尝试背诵短文 学习任务三：学习 2c 部分 1、再读短文，用 2b 中的相关信息完成空格 2、小组合作，核对答案 3、谈谈自己有哪些健康的和不健康的生活习惯，并记下来 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. Doing sports is good ______ your health. A. sees B. reads C. watches 2. I go to _____ work after _____ breakfast every day. A. /, the B. /, / C. the, / 3. -----It's seven o'clock. It's time to go _______. -----OK, Let's go. A. the school B. to school C. my school 4. Ice-cream is not good for us, but it tastes _______. A. well B. good C. bad 5. You can either take a bus ______ go there on foot. A. and B. or C. but II、翻译句子 1、我一般在早上 6：30 左右吃早饭。 ________________________________ ___________ ___ 2、学校 9：00 点钟开始上课。 ________________________________ ___________ ____ 3、晚上我要么看看电视，要么玩玩电脑游戏。 ________________________________ ___________ _ 4、你通常几点到校？ __________ __ 5、人们一般在什么时候吃晚餐啊？ _________________________________________________________ Ⅲ、快乐阅读 My name is Li Hong. I study at No.6 Middle School. At school I have a friend. His name is Jim. We get up at six in the morning. We go to school at seven ten. Classes begin at seven thirty. We have four classes in the morning and two in the afternoon. After school we play games. We often play football. We go home at about five. We do our homework in the evening. We go to bed at around nine fifty. 根据文章,判断正(T)误(F): （ ）1. Li Hong and Jim are friends. （ ）2. They get up at seven o’clock in the morning. （ ）3. They have seven classes every day. （ ）4. They often play games after school. （ ）5. They go to bed at 9:40 in the evening. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 2 What time do you go to school? Section B 3a — Self Check (P12) * 教师寄语：Time works wonders. 时间能创造奇迹。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1. 复习掌握本单元的单词及短语。 2. 熟练运用本单元句型: 3. 了解和掌握相应的语音知识。 4.学会时间和日常作息习惯的表达 【体验学习】：翻译官 1.起床 ___________ 2.穿衣服 __________ 3.过着健康的生活 ______ 4.做家庭作业 _________ 5.对……有益 ___________ 6.散步 ____________ 7.吃早餐 __________ 8.上学 __________ 9.去睡觉 _______ 10.在周末 _________ 11.迟到 ___________ 12.淋浴 ______ 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一:：熟悉掌握本单元单词和短语。 1、自读并记忆单词 5 分钟。 2、组内练习，运用本单元的句型相互提问。 学习任务二：完成 3a 部分。 1．自读 3a，理解每个句子的意思。 2．小组讨论, 给每个句子排好序。. 3．学生质疑，师生共同解惑. 学习任务三：完成 3b 部分。写下自己的日常作息习惯 学习任务四：完成 Self Check 部分。 1. 完成活动 1，先将 A 栏和 B 栏的词组成短语，然后填入句子。 2. 完成活动 2，根据所给的提示写出正确的问句。 学习任务五：了解和掌握相应的语音知识。 要求学生翻到教材 103-104 页，边听边跟读。 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. ---- ________ do you go to school? ----I often go to school ________ 7:30 pm. A. What time, on B. What time, at C. When, in 2. ________ your friend _________ homework? A. Does, does B. Do, does C. Does, do 3. I go to ________ work after _______ breakfast every day. A. /， the B. /，/ C. the，a 4. ---- When do you do__________ homework? ---- I often do ________ homework in the evening. A. you, me B. your, my C. your, me 5. 8:30 am means (意思是)___________. A. half past eight in the morning B. half to eight in the morning C. half past eight in the afternoon II、补全对话 A: Tom. You have a big family. We want to know about your family. B: OK. A: When do you ____________? B: I run in the morning. A: _________ _________does your brother run? B: He runs at 7:00.But my father runs _____ ____ ________(在下午) . A: Does your sister go to school? B:Yes. He _______ ______ _______ _______ 8:00. Ⅲ、作文 假如你是李雷，根据下列时间表，写信向 Tom 介绍一下你早上的活动. _________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________ 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 3 How do you get to school? Section A 1a — 1c (P13) * 教师寄语：No one can call back yesterday. 昨日不会重现。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、谈论如何到达某地；学会用 how 来问路； 2、熟记本节单词和短语。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1.根据单元标题和图片等，预测新课内容； 2.根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3.自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1.到校 ________________ 2.坐火车 ___________________ 3.坐公汽_______________ 4.乘地铁 ___________________ 5.骑单车________________ 6. 步行_____________________ 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一:：完成活动 1a。 1．要求学生尽可能的说出表示交通工具的词汇 2．学习并记住 1a 中的新单词和短语 3．将单词与图画匹配起来 4．对话练习 ------How do you get to school? ------I ride my bike to school 5. 自编对话，并展示 学习任务二：完成 1b 部分。 1． 听录音, 完成活动 1b 2． 听录音, 核对答案 3． 听录音，复述对话内容 学习任务三：完成 1c. 1、熟读 1a 中的对话, 理解并复述. 2、两人合作, 谈论 1b 中人物的上学方式. ------How does Mary get to school? ------She takes the subway, 学习任务四：合作交流, 小结乘坐某种交通工具的方式 take the +交通工具 用来表示“乘……”相当于 by +交通工具 如：I usually take a bus to work. = I usually go to work _____ _____. take the train to school = go to school by train take the taxi to the airport =________________ walk to = go to…on foot ride the bike = by bike 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. ------_________ ----- By bus. A. Why does he go to work? B. How does he go to work? C. When does she go to work? 2. ----- How do you go to school? ----- I ______. A. take bus B. take the bus C. by the bus 3. She usually gets to school on her bike. But she sometimes ______. A. walking B. walk C. walks 4.I usually go to school ___ bike, but sometimes I go to school ___foot. A. with, on B. on, by C. by, on II、句型转换 1、He takes a bus to school .(同义句) He gets to school ________ _________ . 2、I get to work by boat . (划线提问) ________ _________ you get to work ? Ⅲ、完美呈现 1. How ________he _______to school? (get) 2. Liu Pei ___________the train to school. (not take) 3. He ____________ (ride) his bike to work every day. IV 完成单词 1. I usually go to school by bus but s ________on foot. 2. Liu Mei always rides her bike to school and she never t_______ a bus. 3. I hardly ever walk to work. What a________ you? 4. It t______ them one and a half hours to do their homework every day. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 3 How do you get to school? Section A 2a— 2e(P14) * 教师寄语：No one can call back yesterday. 昨日不会重现。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1.学习单词和短语 sixty ,seventy, eighty, ninety, hundred, minute , kilometer, new, every day, by bike. 2．句型：How long does it take? How far is it ? 3、学习 how 对交通方式提问的特殊疑问句。 【体验学习】： 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一: 完成 2a 部分 1. 复习所学数词，并记住新学的数词 2. 听录音，将数字与单词匹配 3. 听录音，边跟读边核对答案 学习任务二：完成 2b,2c,2d 部分 1. 通过师生之间的对话呈现本节课的重点句型 T: How do you get to school? S: I walk to school. T: How long does it take from your home to school ? S: It takes 25 minutes. T: How far is it from your home to school ? S: It’s about 2 kilometers. 2. 通过多种形式练习上面的对话 3. 听录音完成 2b 的表格 4. 完成 2c，再听一遍，核对答案 5. 完成 2d，根据 2b 表格内容，分角色表演对话 学习任务三：完成 2e 部分 1.要求学生边读对话边理解 2.学生质疑，师生共同解惑 3.教师领读或听录音带跟读课文 4. 分角色朗读对话 5. 学生大声朗读并背诵课文 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. ----________ do you get to school? ----I usually walk but sometimes I take the bus. A. How B. What C. How often 2. ----How long does it take？ ----______takes about 25 minutes to walk and 10 minutes by bus. A. That B. This C. It 3. ----How does he get to school? ----He __________ school. A. on foot B. goes to C. walks to 4．________ it take you to walk from your home to your office？ A. How long is B. How long does C. How many time does 5. It takes _______one hour __________my homework every day. A.I; do B. me; to do C. me; doing II、翻译官 1.到达 _ 2. 多远 ____ 3.乘坐地铁 4.乘公交车 _ 5.乘火车 6.八十八 _ __ 7.九十九 __ 8.一百零五 _ 9.你怎样去学校 __ 10.这花费你多长时间？___________________________________________ III. 补全对话 A: do you get to school? B: I the train. A: does it take? B: Oh, around forty minutes. How about you? A: I take the subway. B: How long does it ? A: Oh, thirty-five minutes. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 3 How do you get to school? Section A Grammar Focus— 3c (P15) * 教师寄语：No one can call back yesterday. 昨日不会重现。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1. 巩固 how 对交通方式的提问和 how long 对时间段的提问以及 how far 对距离和路 程的提问。 2. 进一步熟悉一般现在时态的用法。 【体验学习】： 1、It takes about 15 minutes to walk It takes sb some time to do sth 的意思是花费某人多少时间做某事，注意 to do 如;It took me an hour ______(write ) the letter . 如果我们提问时间宾语时，就用_________引导的句型。 如：It takes me 15 minutes to get to school .提问划线部分 ____ _____ does it take you to get to school ? 2、How far is it from your home to school ？ How far 用来询问距离，答语要用表示距离的词语。It 代指的是 距离 It’s 500 meters from my home to school . 提问划线部分 ______ ______ _______ _____from your home to school ? 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一：完成 Grammar Focus 部分 1. 学生自学，并理解句子意思。. 2．朗读句子。 3．学生质疑，师生共同解惑。 4. 小组活动，运用 Grammar Focus 的句子编写对话。 学习任务二：完成 3a 部分 1.学生独自完成练习。 2.小组相互核对答案。 3.分组朗读句子。 学习任务三：完成 3b 部分 1. 学生用所给的词完成句子。 2. 小组核对答案并展示成果 学习任务四：完成 3c 部分 1. 小组活动，完成表格 2. 根据表格信息，一问一答 【自主检测】： I. 精挑细选 1. How far is from Hangzhou to Wuhan? A. that B. / C. it 2. ----_____ do you live from your school? ----About 10 minutes’ walk. A. How many B. How long C. How far 3. I usually get to school ________. A. ride the bike B. on the bike C. by the bike II、方框选词,用所给动词的适当形式填空。 about, how far, think of, walk, ride 1. I usually __________but sometimes I take the bus. 2. The bus ride usually takes ________25 minutes. 3. We're __________ going to visit Mr. Smith. 4. He ___________ the bike to the subway station. 5. A: ___________ does she live from school? B: She lives very near from school. Ⅲ、补全对话 A: __________ does she get to school? B: She takes the subway to school. A: ___________ is it from her home to school? B: It’s 12 miles. A: ____________does it take her to get from home to school? B : It takes 15 minutes . 【快乐链接】 英汉对对碰：Match each word with the right Chinese meaning. drive 单车 bike 火车 train 地铁 subway 开车 car 小轿车 hundred 公里 kilometer 新的 new 每一 every 一百 minute 分钟 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 3 How do you get to school? Section B 1a — 1e (P16) * 教师寄语：Habit is what keeps you going. 习惯让你坚持。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、谈论如何到达某地；能够熟练表达或者询问怎样去某地； 2、 熟记本节单词和短语。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1.bus stop 2.bus station 3.train station __ 4.subway station 5.think of 6.take the subway__________________ 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一：完成 1a,1b 部分 1. 将词组与图片匹配 2．核对答案 3．知识呈现，讲述自己的上学方式（两种） 4. 分组练习 1b 的对话 学习任务二：完成 1c,1d 部分 1. 听录音，并完成 1c, 2. 听录音，核对 1c,的答案 3. 再听一遍，完成 1d，并在组内核对答案 4. 学生质疑，师生共同解惑。 学习任务三：完成 1e 部分 1. 口头谈论 Bob 去爷爷家的方式 2. 将 Bob 去爷爷家的方式写成英语句子并展示 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. ----- does it take？ -----It takes 20 minutes by bus. A. How long B. How far C. How many 2. ----- is it from your school to the hospital? -----It’s about 2 miles. A .How long B. How far C. How many 3.__________do you think _________the transportation in your city? A. What; about B. What; of C. How; of 4. It took me __________ hour to do my homework yesterday. A. a B. an C. / 5.Ｔhe boys goes to school __________ Monday to Friday. A. from B. to C. from to II、完美呈现 1. Linda’s h is far from her school. 2. She t __ the No.16 bus to school every day. 3. It’s twenty m ___ walk from here. 4. After a q ___ breakfast, he goes to school. 5. It usually takes Sally 20 minutes to r her bike to school. 6. How f _ is from his home to school? Ⅲ、按要求改写下列各句，每空一词. 1. We walk to school . ( 同义句转换) We ______ _________ school __________ __________. 2. He often has bread for breakfast. (改为一般疑问句) ________ he often ________ bread for breakfast? 3. Mr. Wilson goes to work by bus every day. (改为同义句) Mr. Wilson ________ ________ ________ ________ work every day. 4. I go to see my uncle by boat. (就划线部分提问) ________ ________you go to see your uncle? 5. She likes going to school on foot. (改为同义句) She likes ________ ________ school. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 3 How do you get to school? Section B 2a — 2c (P17) * 教师寄语：Habit is what keeps you going. 习惯让你坚持。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1. 掌握本节单词和短语 2 .理解本课文章，培养学生用英语表达如何到达某地。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 找出本节课的新单词和短语并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和难点 II、翻译官 1. 许多____________________ 2. 村庄___________________ 3. 两者之间________________ 4. 桥_____________________ 5. 小船____________________ 6. 索道___________________ 7. 梦想____________________ 8. 害怕 __________________ 9. 村民____________________ 10. 实现__________________ 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一：谈论上学方式 1. 写出自己的上学方式并展示 2. 完成 2a，看着 2b 的图片和标题猜猜文章说了什么 学习任务二：学习 2b 短文 1. 自读短文，理解意思 2. 小组讨论短文意思 3. 读文章，回答问题 4. 学生质疑，师生共同解惑, 教师对重点单词和短语作适当的解释。 5. 小组内复述短文 6. 尝试背诵短文 学习任务三：学习 2c 部分 1、再读短文，用 2b 中的相关信息完成空格 2、小组合作，核对答案 3、谈谈文章给了我们什么启示？我们该怎么做？ Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. -----Do you usually go to school _____bus or _____foot? ------I walk to school. A. by, on B. by , by C. on, by 2. The students in the village ______ the river to school. A. pass B. past C. cross 3. It takes them two hours ______ football very day. A. play B. to play C. plays 4. I’m sure your dream will _______true. A. come B. go C. leave 5. ----- What do you _____the trip? ----- It’s interesting. A. think of B. look like C. look at II、改错:下列各句都有一处错误，请找出并在横线上改正。 1. My teacher want to know where I live. _________________________________________________________ 2. How long is it from here to your home? _________________________________________________________ 3. Tom usually with us goes to school by the bike. _________________________________________________________ 4. The boy lives near the school. He often walks to there. _________________________________________________________ 5. This is easy for him to ride a bike. _________________________________________________________ III.写作: 根据所给的交通工具，写一段话，介绍 Lucy 是怎么上学。 家—>步行—>公共汽车站—>地铁站—>步行—>学校 5minutes--10minutes--15minutes--5minutes _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________ 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 3 How do you get to school? Section B 3a — Self Check (P18) * 教师寄语：Habit is what keeps you going. 习惯让你坚持。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1. 复习掌握本单元的单词及短语。 2. 熟练运用本单元句型: 3. 了解和掌握相应的语音知识。 4. 学会写电子邮件 【体验学习】： 翻译以下短语 1.到达 2.多远 _ 3.乘地铁 ____ 4.过河 5.骑自行车 __ 6.考虑 7.步行 8.在…和…之间 __ 9.实现 【课堂导学】： 学习任务一：熟悉掌握本单元单词和短语。 1、自读并记忆单词 5 分钟。 2、组内练习，运用本单元的句型相互提问。 学习任务二：完成 3a 部分。 1．自读 3a，理解每个句子的意思 2．小组讨论, 用所给的词填空. 3．学生质疑，师生共同解惑. 4，讨论电子邮件的写法 学习任务三：完成 3b 部分。 根据所给的提示，谢一封电子邮件给 Tom 学习任务四：完成 Self Check 部分。 1 完成活动 1，根据所给的单词尽可能多的写出短语 2 完成活动 2，根据所给的提示写出 5 个以上的问句 3. 回答所写的问句，然后与同伴练习 学习任务五：了解和掌握相应的语音知识。 要求学生翻到教材 104 页，边听边跟读。 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 1. Mr. Wang is leaving ________ Guangzhou next week. A. to B. with C. for 2. ----________ is it from your home to school? ----- Three miles. A. How far B. How much C. How long 3. It will take the men half a year ________ the work. A. finish B. finishing C. to finish 4. I often go to work ________. A. ride my bike B. by bike C. by a bike 5. Please wait for the bus at the . A. train station B. bus station C. subway station II. 完形填空 Getting to places can sometimes be difficult ,especially(特别) when you are going to a place for the ___1____ time. In big cities, many people take buses, trains or subways to get from ____2____to another. Buses are a popular___3_ of transportation. If you are using a bus, you need to know___4___ bus to take and where you can get on. You ____5___ need to be able to (能够) read the timetable, so you can take the right bus and ____6___ your place on time. At last, you need to know ___7___ to get off and ___8___ the driver the name of the station. In the countryside, transportation can be much simpler (更简单的). In some places, people get to school or work___9___ boat. Some children ride in long boats on the river to get to school. In ___10___places, students walk to the school. 1. A. first B. second C. third 2. A .one place B. the place C. places 3. A. mean B. ways C. means 4. A. what B. where C. which 5. A. too B. as well C. also 6. A. get to B. arrive C. get 7. A. why B. where C. when 8. A. say B. tell C. speak 9. A. on B. in C. by 10. A. other B. others C. else 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 4 Don’t eat in class. Section A 1a—1c ( P19 ) * 教师寄语：No rules, no standards. 没有规矩，不成方圆。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、初步掌握第 19 页的生词和句型； 2、初步了解祈使句； 3、谈论校规; 4. 复习 must 的用法。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 3. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 4. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. school rules _______________ 2. arrive late for class _______________ 3. (be) on time _______________ 4. in the hallways __________________ 5. 在餐厅 ______________ 6. 听音乐____________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Revision How do you get to school? How far is it from your home to school? How long does it take to get to school? Can you arrive late for school? Step2 Presentation (1) Learn the new words and phrases using some pictures. (2) Present key sentences with these pictures. Don’t arrive late for class. We must be on time. Don’t run in the hallways. Don’t eat in the classroom. Don’t listen to music in class. Don’t fight. (3) Finish 1a, and then check the answers. Step3 Listening Listen and finish 1b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Talk about the rules in 1a. II、合作交流 初识祈使句 祈使句表示命令、请求、劝告、征求对方意见等，一般省略主语（you）。 1．肯定祈使句一般以动词原形开头： Run in the hallways. 2．祈使句的否定形式一般在动词原形前加_________: ___________ run in the hallways. (别忘了，以 let 开头的句子也是祈使句的一种结构哦！) 【自主检测】： 精挑细选 （ ）1. If you arrive late _______ class, you must say _______ to your teacher. A. for, thanks B. for, sorry C. to, sorry （ ）2. — Can you sing in the classroom? — _________________ A. Yes, you can. B. No, I can. C. Yes, we can. （ ）3. Don’t arrive late. You must be ________ time. A. to B. on C. at （ ）4. Please listen _______ the teacher carefully (认真地). A. to B. on C. at （ ）5. Don’t _______ TV after class. A. watch B. watches C. watching 【快乐链接】 美国亚利桑那州莫哈维稀奇古怪的规定 美国亚利桑那州莫哈维法律规定：偷肥皂者，罚其用所偷的肥皂洗澡，直到将肥皂用 完。有一个偷走商店一箱肥皂的小偷，结果被关在浴室里整整洗了一个星期。 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 4 Don’t eat in class. Section A 2a—2d ( P20 ) * 教师寄语：No rules, no standards. 没有规矩，不成方圆。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、学习掌握本节课的生词和短语； 2、巩固祈使句的用法； 3、学习情态动词 can 表示许可的肯定句、否定句、一般疑问句及肯定、否定 回答。 4、提高学生的听说能力。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. eat outside ________________ 2. wear a hat ___________________ 3. a lot of ___________________ 4. be late for class_______________ 5. 不得不 __________________ 6. 穿校服_____________________ 7. 保持安静 ________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Revision Review the school rules at P19. Step2 Presentation Present key sentences in this period. This is a great school, but there are a lot of rules. Can we bring music players to school? And we always have to wear the school uniform. And we also have to be quiet in the library. Step3 Listening Listen and finish 2a and 2b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Talk about the rules in 2a. Step5 Role-play Role-play the conversation in 2d. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结情态动词 can 的用法，并练习造句。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 ( )1. —What are the school rules? —We _______ listen to music in class. A. don’t B. can’t C. aren’t ( )2. Don’t________ class. A. be late B. late for C. be late for ( )3. There are ________ rules in our school. A. a lots of B. a lot of C. lot of II、你来我往 选择相应的短语补全对话 A：We have a lot of rules in our school. B：____1_____ A ： Don’t eat in the classroom. Don’t run in the hallways. Don’t listen to music in the classroom._____2____ B：_____3_____ A：We can eat in the dining hall, but we can’t eat in the classroom. B：Can we wear hats in school? A：_____4_____ B：_____5_____ A：No, we don’t have to. B：Oh, there are too many rules. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 4 Don’t eat in class. Section A Grammar Focus — 3c ( P21 ) * 教师寄语：No rules, no standards. 没有规矩，不成方圆。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、总结归纳 Section A 部分语法重点； 2、并将所学知识学以致用。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流： 1． 根据 Grammar Focus, 归纳 Section A 部分语法重点； 2． 勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. be on time for class________________ 2. in class____________________ 3. wear a uniform ___________________ 4. 梦想的学校____________ 5. 不必___________________________ A. No, we can’t. B. Do we have to wear uniforms? C. Can we eat in school? D. Don’t arrive late for school. E. What are the rules? III、完成第 21 页 3a,3b。 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review Review the new words in Section A. Step2 Presentation Read the sentences in Grammar Focus and try to remember them by heart. Step3 Practice (1) Check the answers in 3a. Read the sentences. (2) Check the answers in 3b. Read the sentences. Step4 Consolidation Make up five cool rules for a dream school. Vote for the Coolest School. Ⅲ、合作交流 1. 我能总结所学的校规： _____________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 2. 我能总结情态动词 have to 的用法： _____________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 （ ）1. I have to _______ the room every morning. A. clean B. cleans C. cleaning （ ）2. — Does she have to go to bed at 9:00? — Yes, she__________. A. has B. have C. does （ ）3. Don’t listen music in the classroom hallways. A. to; and B. to; or C. at; or （ ）4. She lost her bike. She _______ walk to school. A. have to B. has to C. has （ ）5. We ________to wear the school uniform every day. A. not have B. have not C. don’t have II、你来我往：将下列句子搭配成对 I （ ）1. Don’t be late for class next time, Helen. （ ）2. What are some of the rules? （ ）3. Can we listen to music in the classroom? （ ）4. Let’s have some bananas! （ ）5. Does he have to go now? 【快乐链接】 Let’s chant together! Don’t, don’t, don’t, don’t eat in class; Don’t, don’t, don’t, don’t wear a hat; II A. No, we can’t. B. No, he doesn’t. C. That sounds good. D. Sorry, Mr. Green. E. Well, we have to wear the school uniform. Don’t, don’t, don’t, don’t be late for school; Don’t, don’t, don’t, don’t run in the hallways. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 4 Don’t eat in class. Section B 1a— 1d ( P22 ) * 教师寄语：Habit is a second nature. 习惯成自然。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、学习谈论家规。 2、掌握句型：“ I must…” , “ I have to…” , “ I can /can’t…” 3、能听懂有关谈论规则的对话并进行自由交际。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. go out _________________ 2. practice the guitar __________________ 3. do the dishes_____________ 4. help his mom make breakfast__________ 5. on school nights __________ 6. every Saturday_____________________ 7. 放学以后 ______________ 8. 在晚上 __________________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Revision Review the words and key sentences we’ve learned in Section A. Step2 Presentation (1) Learn the new phrases in 1b and 1c. (2) Present the key sentences and practice them using the pictures in 1a. (3) Finish 1a, then check the answers. Step3 Listening (1) Listen and finish 1b. Check the answers. (2) Listen again. Finish 1c. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Talk about the rules in Dave’s house. II、 合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何写规章制度的句型，并练习造句。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 （ ）1. Gina often helps her mother ________the dishes. A. do B. does C. doing （ ）2.—_________you have to wear a hat today? — No, we don’t. A. Are B. Can C. Do （ ）3. We don’t know Jack _____ Bruce. A. and B. or C. about II. “译”展身手 Linda is an American girl. She is a good student. Every morning she gets up at 6:00. She has breakfast at home. ( 1 ) Then she wears her uniform and goes to school. She studies hard every day. ( 2 )她在餐厅吃中饭 when she is at school. After school, ( 3 )she does her homework first, and then she cleans the room and ( 4 )帮助她妈妈做晚饭. Before she goes to bed, she usually reads some books. Then at 10:00p.m. she goes to bed. ( 5 )She thinks she is happy every day. What do you think? ( 1 ) ( 2 ) ( 3 ) ( 4 ) ( 5 ) 【快乐链接】 在常见的英文公共标识中，常用“No+名词/动名词”短语来表示禁止的事情。 No food! 禁止带食品！ No photos! 禁止拍照！ No visitors! 禁止游人！ No entry! 禁止入内！ No talking! 禁止交谈！ No smoking！禁止吸烟！ No parking! 禁止停车！ No spitting！ 禁止随地吐痰！ 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 4 Don’t eat in class. Section B 2a— 2c ( P23 ) * 教师寄语：Habit is a second nature. 习惯成自然。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、学习谈论家规。 2、学会使用句型：“ I must…” , “ I have to…” , “ I can /can’t…” 3、能阅读有关谈论规章的文章并完成练习。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. too many rules ___________ 2. make your bed _____________ 3. be noisy_________________ 4. read a book________________ 5. be strict with sb. __________ 6. make rules to help us_________ 7. 在周末 ________________ 8. 好运！ __________________ III、完成第 23 页 2b 和 2c。 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk T: When you are unhappy about something, who do you like to talk to? Step2 Presentation (1) Learn the new words in 2b. (2) Read the letters and underline the rules for Molly. Check the answers. (3) Read the letters again and finish 2c. Check the answers. Step3 Group work Discuss the difficulties you found in 2b. Try to understand the letters. Step4 Consolidation Read the letters aloud. II、 合作交流 Group work: 收集不同的家规并写下来。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选： （ ）1. I can’t relax_______. A. too B. also C. either （ ）2. There are too many ________ in the kitchen. A. vegetables B. milk C. rice （ ）3. On school nights, I have to go to bed________ 9:00. A. on B. in C. before II、快乐阅读：阅读下面的短文，选择正确的答案。 Dear Dave, I’m not happy. There are too many rules in my house. It isn’t fair. I have to get up at five o’clock every morning. I can’t arrive late for school. I have to be there at eight o’clock. I have to come back home after school because I have to do my homework. In the evening I can’t watch TV because I have to help my mother make dinner and wash the dishes. I have to go to bed before ten o’clock. On weekends, I have to stay at home on Saturday morning. I have to clean my room and wash my clothes by eleven o’clock. On Saturday afternoon, I have to go to the children’s palace to learn the piano. Do you have lots of rules? Are they fair? Your friend, Alice ( )1. Who is the letter from? A. Dave. B. Alice. C. Alice’s mother. ( )2. What time does Alice have to get up? A. Five o’clock. B. Eight o’clock. C. Ten o’clock. ( )3. What does Alice have to do on Saturday morning? A. Wash the dishes. B. Wash her clothes. C. Learn the piano. ( )4. Why does she go to the children’s palace? A. To play football. B. To learn math. C. To learn piano. 【快乐链接】 巧记“看”的用法 看电影我们常用 see, 读书看报用 read; 电视、戏剧和比赛，凡是表演用 watch。 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 4 Don’t eat in class. Section B 3a— Self Check ( P24 ) * 教师寄语：Habit is a second nature. 习惯成自然。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、复习谈论规章制度。 2、复习使用 must, have to, can 和 can’t。 3、练习写自己身边的规章制度。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 3. 完成第 24 页 3a，3b 和 Self Check。 II、翻译官 1. keep my hair short ___________ 2. relax on weekends __________ 3. learn to play the piano_________ 4. read a book________________ 5. have fun ___________________ 6. 在家_____________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk Talk about the rules we have at home and in our school. Step2 Presentation (1) Review words and phrases. (2) Review some sentence patterns. (3) Review how to write rules. Step3 Practice (1) Finish 3a. Check the answers. (2) Finish 1, 2 in Self Check. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Work in pairs and finish 3c. Write down the rules. II、合作交流 Group work: 讨论如何写信谈论身边的规章制度并写下来。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 ( )1. —Can we speak Chinese? — _______. A. Yes, you can B. OK, you speak C. No, you don’t ( )2. — _________. Your father is sleeping in the room. — Oh, sorry. A. Not talk B. Not talking C. No talking ( ) 3. Don’t eat ________class. A. at B. in C. to II、快乐阅读： We have different kinds of rules in our classroom. As a student we must follow them. Students can not bring food into the classroom because our classroom is a place for us to study. The food may make our classroom dirty. And we can’t study well when one is eating. Don’t run or fight in the classroom. It’s quite dangerous because we may get hurt(受伤的). We need a quiet place for study. Don’t listen to music in the classroom. Listening to music may disturb (打扰) others. ( ) 1.How many rules are mentioned(提到) in the passage? A. Two. B. Three. C. Five. ( ) 2. We can __________ in the classroom. A. listen to music B. speak C. run ( ) 3. Which is the best title(标题) for the passage? A. The Rules in Our Home B. The Rules in Our Classroom C. Don’t Eat in the Classroom 【快乐链接】 Our School Rules! 1. We have kind hands and feet and don’t fight with others. 2. We welcome all visitors. 3. We look after each other. 4. We do the very best we can. 你还能加上几条？__________________________________________________ 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 5 Why do you like pandas? Section A 1a—1c ( P25) * 教师寄语：Love me, love my dog. 爱屋及乌。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、初步掌握第 25 页的生词和句型； 2、描述动物，谈论喜好。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. welcome to the zoo ___________ 2. my favorite animals ______________ 3. want to see them______________ 4. 大象_________________________ 5. 树袋熊，考拉 ______________ 6. 长颈鹿________________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Brainstorming(头脑风暴) Try to speak out the names of animals you know. Step2 Presentation (1) Learn the new words about animals using some pictures. (2) Present key sentences with these pictures. —Let’s see the pandas first. —Why do you want to see them? —Because they’re very cute. (3) Finish 1a, and then check the answers. Step3 Listening Listen and finish 1b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Talk about the animals in 1a. II、合作交流 Group work: 你知道多少动物的英文表达？能写出来吗？ Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 （ ）1. Which kind of animals have long legs and neck? A. Pandas B. Penguins C. Giraffes （ ）2. ______ is the biggest animal on the earth. A. An elephant B. A koala C. A giraffe （ ）3. —Why do you like koalas? —_____ they are cute and smart. A. So B. But C. Because （ ）4. There is _______ elephant in the zoo. _______ elephant is from Africa. A. a; the B. an; the C. an; An （ ）5. _______ see the giraffes. A. Let’s me B. Let’s C. Let we II、“译”展身手 1. 欢迎来到动物园！ _________ ________ the zoo! 2. 让我们先看熊猫吧！ _________ see the pandas _______! 3. 你为什么想去看狮子？ _________ do you ________ ________see lions? 【快乐链接】 英汉对对碰：Match each word with the right Chinese meaning. dolphin 袋鼠 wolf 鹰 penguin 兔子 kangaroo 海豚 horse 企鹅 rabbit 马 bear 孔雀 eagle 天鹅 peacock 狼 swan 熊 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 5 Why do you like pandas? Section A 2a—2d ( P26) * 教师寄语：Love me, love my dog. 爱屋及乌。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、学习掌握本节课的生词和短语； 2、描述动物，谈论喜好。 3、提高学生的听说能力。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. really scary________________ 2. kind of___________________ 3.South Africa________________ 4. be from__________________ 5. walk on two legs____________ 6. sleep all day_______________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk Get the students to talk about their favorite animals. Step2 Presentation Present key sentences in this period. Where are they from? They’re from Africa. He can walk on two legs. He sleeps all day. That’s a good name for her. Step3 Listening Listen and finish 2a and 2b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Talk about the animals in 2a. Step5 Role-play Role-play the conversation in 2d. II、合作交流 Group work: 你能把描述动物的形容词都写下来吗？ Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 ( )1. What do you want _________? A. eat B. to eat C. eating ( )2. Pandas are ________cute. A. kinds of B. a kind of C. kind of ( )3. He can walk________ two legs. A. in B. on C. at II、补全对话 A：Let’s see the elephant first. B：The elephants? Why do you want to see elephants? A：(1)_________________ B：(2)_________________ A：They’re from South Africa. (3)_________________ B：My favorite animal is panda. A：(4)_________________ B：Because they’re very cute. A：(5)_________________ B：They’re over there! Let’s go! 【快乐链接】 各国代表性动物 Panda (熊猫)：大熊猫憨态可掬，是中国的国宝，被动物学家称为“活化石”。 Kangaroo (袋鼠)：被澳大利亚人视为国家的象征。澳大利亚的国徽上就有袋鼠的形象。 Bald eagle (白头海雕)：美国的国鸟，是一种大型猛禽。 Bear (熊)：俄罗斯的代表动物。 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 5 Why do you like pandas? Section A Grammar Focus—3c ( P27) * 教师寄语：Love me, love my dog. 爱屋及乌。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、总结归纳 Section A 部分语法重点； 2、并将所学知识学以致用。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流： 1． 根据 Grammar Focus, 归纳 Section A 部分语法重点； 2． 勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. a lot________________________ 2. black and white______________ 3. you’re right __________________ 4. 你为什么不喜欢狮子？______________________________________ 5. 因为它们真的很恐怖。______________________________________ III、完成第 27 页 3a,3b。 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review Review the new words in Section A. Step2 Presentation Read the sentences in Grammar Focus and try to remember them by heart. Step3 Practice (1) Check the answers in 3a. Read the sentences. (2) Finish 3b. Get the students to write their own sentences. Step4 Game Ask and answer questions to guess each other’s animal. Ⅲ、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结 Section A 的重点句型，并练习造句。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 （ ）1. Why _______ you like lions? A. not B. don’t C. aren’t （ ）2. ______ pandas are really cute, ______ I like them very much. A. Because, so B. So, because C. Because, / （ ）3. She______ Australia. X k B 1 . c o m A. be from B. is from C. are from （ ）4. She likes dogs _______. A. a lot B. a lot of C. lot of II、完形填空 My parents and I like animals. And we often go to the 1 to see them ___2__ weekends. We often ___3__a bus to go there because my home is 4__far from the zoo. Of all the animals, I __5___tigers best. Sometimes I want 6 some meat to 7 . 8 my parents don’t let me do it. Sometimes I think animals in the zoo may want to go back to the forest. But I also think zoos are good places 9 animals. People give them 10 , so they’re not hungry every day. Do you think so? （ ）1. A. library B. zoo C. park （ ）2. A. on B. in C. at （ ）3. A. by B. take C. in （ ）4. A. a kind of B. kind of C. kinds of （ ）5. A. meet B. like C. hope （ ）6. A. give B. gives C. to give （ ）7. A. them B. us C. you （ ）8. A. So B. And C. But （ ）9. A. on B. at C. for （ ）10. A. water B. food C. help 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 5 Why do you like pandas? Section B 1a— 1d ( P28 ) * 教师寄语：A cat has nine lives. 吉人天相。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、描述动物，谈论喜好。 2、能听懂有关谈论喜好的对话并进行自由交际。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. friendly _________________ 2. shy __________________ 3. 美丽的__________________ 4. 懒惰的_______________ 5. What animals do you like?______________________________ 6. I like dogs because they’re friendly and smart. ____________________________________________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Revision Review the words and key sentences we’ve learned in Section A. Step2 Presentation (1) Learn the new description words in 1a. (2) Finish 1a, then check the answers. Step3 Listening (3) Listen and finish 1b. Check the answers. (4) Listen again. Finish 1c. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Talk about the animals. II、 合作交流 Group work: 分析总结表达喜好的句型，并练习造句。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： 快乐阅读： Welcome to the zoo! Opening Fees Monday to Friday Adults(成人)：$ 8.00 10:00 a.m. – 6:00 p.m. 15 – 18: $ 6.00 Saturday to Sunday 8 – 14: $ 3.00 8:00 a.m. – 8:00 p.m. Under 8: free(免费) ( )1. On Sunday, the zoo opens at_______. A. 10:00 in the morning B. 8:00 in the morning C. 8:00 in the afternoon ( )2. The zoo opens ______ days a week. A. two B. five C. seven ( )3. If you are 13 years old, and you want to go to the zoo, you should pay______. A. $ 3 B. $ 6 C. $ 8 ( )4. Kate is 12, and her little sister is 6. If they go to the zoo, they should pay____. A. $ 8 B. $ 6 C. $ 3 ( )5. The zoo closes (关) at ________ on Wednesday. A. 10:00 a.m. B. 6:00 a.m. C. 6:00 p.m. 【快乐链接】 英汉对对碰：Match each sentence with the right Chinese meaning. Love me, love my dog. Every dog has its day. Beat the dog before the lion. A cat has nine lives. Fine feathers make fine birds. 杀鸡给猴看。 人要衣装，佛靠金装。 每个人都有得意的日子。 爱屋及乌。 吉人天相。 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 5 Why do you like pandas? Section B 2a— 2c( P29 ) * 教师寄语：A cat has nine lives. 吉人天相。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、描述动物，谈论喜好。 2、能阅读较长文章并完成练习。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. save the elephants__________ 2. one of Thailand’s symbols_________ 3. get lost __________________ 4. be in great danger________________ 5. 砍倒____________________ 6. made of ivory___________________ 7. An elephant never forgets.________________________________________ 8. People also kill elephants for their ivory._____________________________ III、完成第 29 页 2b 和 2c。 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk T: Talk about the animals you think are in great danger. Step2 Presentation (4) Learn the new words in 2b. (5) Read the website article and check the best title for it. Check the answers. (6) Read the article again and finish 2c. Check the answers. Step3 Group work Discuss the difficulties you found in 2b. Try to understand the article. Step4 Consolidation Retell the article according to the mind map. II、 合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何画好课文导图。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、连词成句 1. is, this, luck, a, of, symbol, good (.) ___________________________________________________________ 2. elephants, great, are, danger, in (.) ___________________________________________________________ 3. trees, must, the, save, people (.) ___________________________________________________________ II、“译”展身手 Today is Sunday. It is sunny(晴朗的). (1 ) Dale and Tom don’t go to school. They want to go to the zoo, ( 2 ) because there is an elephant in the zoo. They take a bus to the zoo. After one hour, they get to the zoo. They see the elephant. ( 3 ) 她真的很漂亮。Her name is Ling. ( 4 ) 她来自非 洲。She is only five years old. She’s very quiet. Children(孩子们) like her a lot. ( 5 ) They want to play with her, but Ling is very shy. People in the zoo tell them to be quiet. ( 1 ) ( 2 ) ( 3 ) ( 4 ) ( 5 ) 【快乐链接】 Birds that can’t fly Penguins are birds, but they can’t fly. They can stand and walk. It’s very interesting to see penguins walking. When they walk, they sway their bodies. It makes them look cute and funny. Penguins are short and fat. With black backs and white bellies(腹部), they look like gentlemen wearing tailcoats. Penguins live in cold places so they must eat a lot. Fish are their favorite food. Answer the following questions. 1. Can all the birds fly? 2. What is penguins’ favorite food? 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 5 Why do you like pandas? Section B 3a— Self Check ( P30 ) * 教师寄语：A cat has nine lives. 吉人天相。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、复习描述动物，谈论喜好。 2、描述自己喜欢的动物。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. Isn’t she beautiful?___________________________________________ 2. She is from Africa. ___________________________________________ 3. I like dogs because they are friendly and smart._____________________ 4. He lives in China. ____________________________________________ III、完成第 30 页 3a, 3b 和 Self Check。 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk Talk about your favorite animals. Step2 Presentation (1) Review new words and phrases. (2) Review some sentence patterns. (3) Review how to write our favorite animals.. Step3 Practice (3) Finish 3a. Check the answers. (4) Finish 1, 2 in Self Check. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Work in pairs and finish 3b. Write down the article. II、 合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何描述自己最喜欢的动物。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【快乐阅读】： Baboons(狒狒) live in Africa. They are like monkeys. Most people think daddy baboons don’t know their babies. But scientists (科学家) find that daddy baboons know how to help their babies. The daddy baboons are smart. Joan Silk is a scientist. She studies the baboons for 3 years. She says the daddy baboons are happy to see their babies. They have big teeth to help the babies to eat hard things. Mother baboons are small. And they live in a place. When a mother baboon gives birth(分娩), she often has only one baby. Baby baboons have fur. They are very cute. During the day and eat things. At night, they sleep in the trees. Most children like baboons because they look like the man. ( )1. Where do baboons live? A. In Africa. B. In America. C. In Canada. ( )2. How are daddy baboons? A. They are shy. B. They are beautiful. C. They are smart. ( )3. They underlined word “hard” means________ in Chinese. A. 困难的 B. 柔软的 C. 坚硬的 ( )4. The mother baboon usually has _______baby baboon(s) when she gives birth. A. one B. two C. three ( )5. Which of the following is TRUE? A. Baboons are small monkeys. B. Baby baboons are very cute. C. Daddy baboons don’t know how to help their babies. 【快乐链接】 妙趣横生的“as…as” 1. as blind as a bat(像蝙蝠一样盲目) 2. as busy as a bee(像蜜蜂一样忙碌) 3. as angry as a bull(像公牛一样愤怒) 4. as bald as an eagle(像鹰一样秃顶) 5. as sly as a fox (像狐狸一样狡猾) 6. as brave as a lion(像狮子一样勇敢) 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 6 I’m watching TV. Section A 1a—1c ( P31 ) * 教师寄语：Time flies. 光阴似箭。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、初步掌握第 31 页的生词和句型； 2、初步了解现在进行时； 3、谈论人们的行为。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 5. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 6. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. read a newspaper ______________ 2. talk on the phone __________________ 3. listen to a CD _________________ 4. use the computer __________________ 5. make soup ____________________ 6. 洗碗____________________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Brainstorming Speak out the names of animals as quickly as you can. Step2 Presentation (1) Learn the new words and phrases using some pictures. (2) Present key sentences with these pictures. —What are you doing? —I’m watching TV. I’m reading a newspaper. I’m talking on the phone. I’m using the computer. I’m making soup. I’m washing the dishes. I’m exercising. (3) Finish 1a, and then check the answers. Step3 Listening Listen and finish 1b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Talk about what people are doing in 1a. II、合作交流 Group work: 你能写出几个含现在进行时的句子？ Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： 精挑细选 （ ）1. —What is Tom doing? —He __________the computer. A. use B. is useing C. is using （ ）2. His father is _________ a newspaper. A. looking B. seeing C. reading （ ）3. The students are _________ the teacher. A. listen to B. listening to C. listening （ ）4. The girls _______ in the classroom. A. sings B. singing C. are singing （ ）5. The girl often talks ________the phone with her mother. A. to B. on C. with 【快乐链接】 "ing"的来历 相传很久很久以前有一个国王 (king)，他非常喜欢 sing，每天在王宫里唱歌，，连国家 的事都扔在脑后不管，大臣们都很着急，但又都没有办法。 有一天，这个国王照例在王宫里引吭高歌，这时一个外国使节有事想求见国王。大臣们 进去禀报了几次，但是国王唱兴正浓，就是不出来接见。大臣们又不敢对外国使节说国王正 在里面 sing，怕人家生气。正在大家不知怎么办时，有一个大臣想出了一个办法，他假装 到里面去禀报国王，然后出来对外国使节说国王有急事，他正在里面 "ing"，今天不能接见。 外国使节不知"ing"是怎么回事，只知道国王有急事，正在"ing"，又不便多问，只得怏怏离 去。 从此以后，每当国王在唱歌，而又有人求见时，大臣们就用国王正在"ing"打发来者。 久而久之，"ing"就成了国王正在做某事的代用词。 慢慢地这种说法流传到了民间，人们只要一说起某人正在做某事，便在动词原形后面加 上 ing。后来为了区别不同的人称，人们又在主语后面加上了 be 动词， 形成了"be + 现在 分词(present participle)"形式的现在进行时态。 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 6 I’m watching TV. Section A 2a—2d ( P32 ) * 教师寄语：Time flies. 光阴似箭。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、学习掌握本节课的生词和短语； 2、初步了解现在进行时； 3、谈论人们的行为。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. go to the movies _______________ 2. This is Jenny.___________________ 3. Not much.____________________ 4. join me for dinner_______________ 5. eat out_______________________ 6. 六点半_______________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Revision Review the key sentences by asking and answering questions. Step2 Presentation Present key sentences in this period. Do you want to go to the movies? This is Jenny. Not much. Do you want to join me for dinner? We can eat out. Come at half past six. Step3 Listening Listen and finish 2a and 2b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Role-play the conversation in 2b. Step5 Role-play Role-play the conversation in 2d. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结本课出现的电话用语。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 ( )1. Do you want ________ the movies? A. to go B. go to C. to go to ( )2. I’m just_______ my clothes. A. wash B. washing C. is washing ( )3. Let’s _______ at my home first. A. meet B. to meet C. meeting II、补全对话 Tom：Hello? (1)_______________________________ Jack：Hi, Tom. It’s Jack here. Tom：Hi, Jack! (2)_____________________________ Jack：I’m reading a newspaper. What about you? Tom：(3)________________________________The TV show is kind of boring. Jack：Do you want to go to a movie? Tom：(4)_________________________________ I like movies. When shall we meet? Jack：(5)_________________________________ Tom：OK. See you then. 【快乐链接】 Let’s chant together! — What are you doing? — I’m watching TV. — What’s he doing? — He is reading. — What’s she doing? — She is cleaning. — What are they doing? — They’re making dinner. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 6 I’m watching TV. Section A Grammar Focus — 3c ( P33 ) * 教师寄语：Time flies. 光阴似箭。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、总结归纳 Section A 部分语法重点； 2、比较一般现在时与现在进行时的用法区别； 3、将所学知识学以致用。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流： 3． 根据 Grammar Focus, 归纳 Section A 部分语法重点； 4． 勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. now ______________________ 2. on Mondays ____________________ 3. every night_________________ 4. in the mornings__________________ 5. clean the house _____________ 6. make dinner_____________________ 7. drink tea___________________ 8. on weekends_____________________ III、完成第 33 页 3a,3b。 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review Review the new words in Section A. Step2 Presentation Read the sentences in Grammar Focus and try to remember them by heart. Step3 Practice (1) Check the answers in 3a. Read the sentences. (2) Check the answers in 3b. Read the conversation. Step4 Game Guess some activities. Ⅲ、合作交流 Group work: 我能总结现在分词的构成方法： Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、写出下列单词的现在分词: 1. do ______________ 2. play _____________ 3. go ______________ 4. see _____________ 5. read ______________ 6. make ______________ 7. use ______________ 8. walk ______________ 9. exercise ______________ 10. have ______________ II、精挑细选 （ ）1. Han Mei _________ her homework every day at home. A. do B. does C. is doing （ ）2. — ________ English every morning? — Yes, but now I ________ Chinese. A. Are you reading; read B. Do you read; read C. Do you read; am reading （ ）3. — Is your brother doing his homework? —_________________. A. Yes, he does. B. Yes, he is. C. No, he doesn’t. （ ）4. Linda often _______ her homework in the evening but this evening she _________ TV. A. does; is watching B. is doing; watches C. is doing, is watching （ ）5. — ________ are they doing? — They’re _________. A. What, run B. What, running C. Who, running 【快乐链接】 下列时间状语分别用于哪种时态? every Saturday, on Sundays, now, in the mornings, on weekends, at this time, every day, after dinner 一般现在时 现在进行时 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 6 I’m watching TV. Section B 1a— 1e ( P34 ) * 教师寄语：Seeing is believing. 百闻不如一见。 【学习目标】【学习重点】：X k B 1 . c o m 1、谈论人们正在进行的活动。 2、掌握句型：Is the man swimming in the river? Yes, he is. / No, he isn’t. 3、能听懂谈论活动的对话并进行自由交际。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. at school ________________ 2. play basketball __________________ 3. in a river_________________ 4. in a pool_________________________ 5. 在超市 _________________ 6. 他正在游泳。___________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Revision Review the words and key sentences we’ve learned in Section A. Step2 Presentation (1) Learn the new words and phrases in 1a and 1b. (2) Present the key sentences and practice them using the pictures in 1a. (3) Finish 1a, then check the answers. Step3 Listening (5) Listen and finish 1c. (6) Listen again. Finish 1d. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Make conversations using the information in 1a and 1c. II、 合作交流 Group work: 哪些单词的现在分词是需要先双写词尾辅音字母，再加-ing? Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 （ ）1. — Are Tom and you watching TV? — ________________________. A. Yes, they are B. Yes, we are C. No, we are （ ）2.— Are they playing__________? — No, they’re playing__________. A. the basketball, the guitar B. basketball, guitar C. basketball, the guitar （ ）3. — Where is Linda? — She _________in the supermarket. A. shop B. shops C. is shopping II、完形填空 Ann is __ 1 _American worker. She works___2___a big factory(工厂) in America. It’s___3___in the morning. Ann __ 4____ up. She is sitting on the bed. She is putting____5___her clothes. She 6 ___nothing to do today. Now Ann 7 at the table. She is 8 her breakfast. There is a cup of orange and some bread on the table. Ann is _ 9 _ the orange and eating the bread. She is _10 _ today’s newspaper. （ ）1. A. a B. an C. the （ ）2. A. in B. on C. at （ ）3. A. half six B. half past six C. six past half （ ）4. A. gets B. is geting C. is getting （ ）5. A. off B. down C. on （ ）6. A. has B. have C. is having （ ）7. A. sit B. sits C. is sitting （ ）8. A. eating B. eat C. eats （ ）9. A. seeing B. eating C. drinking （ ）10. A. reading B. watching C. seeing 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 6 I’m watching TV. Section B 2a— 2c ( P35 ) * 教师寄语：Seeing is believing. 百闻不如一见。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、谈论人们正在进行的活动。 2、能阅读有关谈论活动的文章并完成练习。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. watch boat races _________________ 2. host family ___________________ 3. the United States_________________ 4. an American family_____________ 5. Dragon Boat Festival _____________ 6. the night before the festival_______ 7. any other _______________________ 8. young children_________________ 9. miss his family_________________ 10. no place like home ____________ III、完成第 35 页 2b 和 2c。 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk Talk about festivals in China and western countries. Step2 Presentation (7) Learn the new words in 2b. (8) Read the TV report and answer the questions. Check the answers. (9) Read the report again and finish 2c. Check the answers. Step3 Group work Discuss the difficulties you found in 2b. Try to understand the report. Step4 Consolidation Read the report aloud. II、 合作交流 Group work: 尝试为课文画导图, 并复述课文。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选： （ ）1. — _________ is it in New York? — It’s nine o’clock in the morning. A. How B. What C. What time （ ）2. I ________my room every day. But now I _________. A. clean; am reading B. am cleaning; am reading C. clean; read （ ）3. Let me _______a look. A. have B. to have C. having II. “译”展身手 It is Monday today. Tony gets up at 6:00. ( 1 )他妈妈正在做早餐。( 2 )His father is doing sports in the garden. Lily, his sister, is sleeping in the room. She doesn’t need to go to school. So she doesn’t need to get up. “She is lucky(幸运的), ” Tony thinks. After having breakfast, ( 3 ) Tony takes a bus to school. There are many people on it. He arrives at school at 7:00. School starts at 8:00. But there are many students in the classroom. Some students are cleaning the classroom. ( 4 ) 一些学生正在读书。And others are writing. ( 5 )Tony helps his friend clean the classroom. ( 1 ) ( 2 ) ( 3 ) ( 4 ) ( 5 ) 【快乐链接】 你知道这些英文表达吗？ 除 夕 Chinese New Year’s Eve 春 节 Spring Festival 元宵节 Lantern Festival 植树节 Tree Planting Day 清明节 Tomb Sweeping Day 端午节 Dragon Boat Festival 中秋节 Mid-Autumn Festival 重阳节 Double-Ninth Festival 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 6 I’m watching TV. Section B 3a— Self Check ( P36 ) * 教师寄语：Seeing is believing. 百闻不如一见。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、复习现在进行时； 2、练习写人们正在进行的活动。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 3. 完成第 36 页 3a，3b 和 Self Check。 II、翻译官 1. 我家的一张照片 _____________ 2. 在家_____________________ 3. 做家庭作业__________________ 4. living room________________ 5. listen to the radio ______________ 6. talk show__________________ 7. study for a test_________________ 8. play soccer________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk Talk about people’s activities. Step2 Presentation (1) Review words and phrases. (2) Review some sentence patterns. (3) Review how to write people’s activities. Step3 Practice (5) Finish 3a. Check the answers. (6) Finish 1, 2 in Self Check. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Work in pairs and finish 3b. Write down a letter. II、合作交流 Group work: 讨论如何描述照片上人们的活动。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 ( )1. It’s seven now. Lisa_________. A. is shopping B. shopping C. shops ( )2. This is a photo _______my family. A. of B. for C. at ( ) 3. Here ________ some of my books. A. is B. are C. be ( )4. In the ________ picture, Sun Yang is swimming. A. two B. second C. three ( )5. Jack _______ doing _______ homework. A. is; her B. is; my C. isn’t; his II、快乐阅读： There is a park near my home. People like to go to this park after work. Some of them go to the park every day. Look! That is Mr. King. He is sitting on a chair and watching the children. Some children are playing a game. Some boys are playing football. Lucy and Lily are standing under a tree. They are talking. There is a small river in the park. We can see boats on the water. Some children are sitting in the boats with their parents. Listen! A girl is singing. This is a really nice park. I come here after school every day. ( ) 1. There are some _______ in the park. A. birds and cats B. chairs and boats C. balls and kites ( ) 2. Lucy is talking with________. A. Mr. King B. the boys C. Lily ( ) 3. The writer (作者) can’t see ________ in the park. A. birds B. men C. women ( ) 4. What is the writer doing? A. He’s watching the people in the park. B. He’s playing a game. C. He’s sitting in a boat. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 7 It’s raining! Section A 1a - 1c (P37) * 教师寄语：Save for a rainy day. 未雨绸缪。 【学习目标】： 1. 学习常用天气词汇； 2. 学会如何描述天气。 --How’s the weather in …? -- It’s …. 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据单元标题和图片等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读新单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 正在下雨_________________ 2. 正在下雪_________________ 3. 多云的___________________ 4. 晴朗的 __________________ 5. 刮风的___________________ 6. 天气_____________________ 7. 下雨;雨/下雪;雪___________ 8. Boston ___________________ 9. Moscow __________________ 10. Toronto___________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk Try to speak out the names of weather you know. Step2 Presentation 1. Learn the new words about weather in 1a. 2. Finish 1a. Then check the answers. 3. Look at the picture in 1a and learn the drills: --How’s the weather in …? -- It’s …. Step3 Listening Listen and finish 1b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Practice the conversations in 1a .Then make your own conversations. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何描述天气，并练习造句。 Notes:______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： It’s a ________(阴天的) day today. 1. It’s ________(下雨) today, so I can’t go to the zoo. 2. -How is the weather in your city today? -It’s ________(晴朗的). 3. It’s ______(有风的) today. I want to take a bus to school. 4. It is _______(下雪) in our city. The kids are very happy because they can make snowmen(雪 人). 请用 How’s 或 What’s 填空。 1. _______ the weather today? 2. _______ the weather like today? 【快乐链接】 形容词后缀-y snow - snowy 有雪的 rain - rainy 有雨的 cloud – cloudy 多云的 storm – stormy 暴风雨的 wind – windy 刮风的 sun – sunny 晴朗的 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 7 It’s raining! Section A 2a -2d (P38) *教师寄语：Save for a rainy day. 未雨绸缪。 【学习目标】： 1. 了解现在进行时结构：be + v.-ing. 2. 学会描述某人正在做什么。 --What is/are … doing? --…is/are doing…. 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据课本图片和对话等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读新单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 乔叔叔 _____________________ 2. 萨莉阿姨 ________________ 3. 没问题 ______________________ 4. 捎个口信 ________________ 5. 你好，我是里克。_______________________________________________ 6. 你正在做什么？_________________________________________________ 7. 最近怎么样? __________________________________________________ 8. 你能让他给我回电话吗? _________________________________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk Talk about the everyday activities you know. Step2 Presentation 1. Look at the picture in 2a. 2. Guess what the people are doing. Step3 Listening 1. Listen to the tape. Finish2a. 2. Go through the sentences in 2b. 3. Listen and finish 2b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work 1. Ask and answer questions with your partner. Finish 2c. 2. Role-play the conversation in 2d. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何描述某人正在做什么，并模仿 2d 编写对话。 Notes: ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、完美呈现 1. –Where is his sister? --She is ___________(学习) at home. 2. –Is your aunt ____________(煮) dinner? --Yes, she is. 3. –How’s your school trip? --It’s __________(很糟的). 4. We can use e-mail to send ______________(信息). II、你来我往 A: Hello, Tom speaking. B: Hi, Tom. It’s Bob. 1. _________________________________? A: Not bad, thank you. 2. ________________________________? B: I’m playing soccer with some friends at the park. A: 3._________________________________. B: Yeah. Is your brother at home? A: Oh, he’s not here. He’s studying at his friend’s home. 4. _________________________________? B: Yes. Could you just tell him to call me back? A: 5._________________________________. 【快乐链接】 打电话用语 Hello/Hi! 你好！ This is/It’s …. 我是…. Who’s that? 你是谁呀？ Is … at home? … 在家吗？ This is … speaking. 我是…. How’s it going? 最近怎么样？ Oh, he/she is not here. 哦，他/她不在家。 Can I take a message for you? 我能给你捎个口信吗？ Could you tell him/her to call me back? 你能让他/她给我回电话吗？ 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 7 It’s raining! Section A Grammar Focus-3b (P39) * 教师寄语：Save for a rainy day. 未雨绸缪。 【学习目标】： 1. 总结归纳 Section A 部分知识重点； 2. 学会运用 Section A 部分所学知识。 【体验学习】： 预习交流 1. 根据 Grammar Focus, 归纳 Section A 部分知识重点； 2. 自学课文，试着完成 3a,3b 的练习。 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Grammar Focus 1. Give a summary about it. 2. Try to recite it. Step2 Presentation 1. Go through the sentences in 3a. Complete the conversations. 2. Check the answers and practice the conversations. Step3 Group work 1. Look at the pictures in 3b. Try to fill in the chart. 2. Work in groups. Ask and answer using the messages in the chart. II、合作交流 Group work: 总结归纳 Section A 部分知识重点。 1.描述天气的词汇： _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ 2.描述天气的句子: _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ 3.描述某人正在做什么的句子： ______________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： Ⅰ、完美呈现 be rain go snow study 1. –How’s it __________? --Great! 2. It’s ___________ now. It’s very cold. 3. –How __________ the weather in Shanghai today? --It’s fine. 4. –What is Tom doing? --He is __________ math. 5. It’s __________ outside now. You need to take an umbrella(雨伞). Ⅱ、最佳搭档 ( ) 1. How’s the weather? A. No, it isn’t. ( ) 2. How’s it going? B. This is Ben. ( ) 3. Who’s that speaking? C. I’m watching TV. ( ) 4. What are you doing? D. Snowy. ( ) 5. Is it rainy in Boston? E. Great! 【快乐链接】 现在进行时的各种句式 句 式 构 成 肯定句 主语+ am/is/are + 动词-ing 形式… 否定句 主语+ am/is/are + not + 动词-ing 形式… 一般疑问句 Am/Is/Are + 主语+ 动词-ing 形式…？ 特殊疑问句 特殊疑问词+ am/is/are +（主语）+动词-ing 形式…？ 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 7 It’s raining! Section B 1a - 1e (P40) 教师寄语： It never rains but it pours. 不鸣则已，一鸣惊人。 【学习目标】： 1. 继续学习常用天气词汇； 2. 学会谈论天气。 --How’s the weather in …? -- It’s …. 3. 学会谈论某人正在做什么。 --What are you doing? --I’m doing.... 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和对话等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读新单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 寒冷的-温暖的________________ 2. 炎热的-凉爽的________________ 3. 干燥的-潮湿的________________ 4. 好极了-糟透了________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Revision Review the words of weather. Step2 Presentation 1. Learn and remember the names of weather in 1a. Finish1a. 2. Game: Quick action about the weather. eg: A: 寒冷的.  B: cold. 3. Ask and answer questions. Finish1b. Step3 Listening 1. Go through the chart in 1c. 2. Listen to the tape. Finish 1c&1d. Then check the answers. Step4 Pair work Role-play a conversation between Mary and Eric. II、合作交流 Group work: 总结归纳有关天气的词汇。 Weather: _________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、完美呈现 1. In winter(冬季), it’s__________(寒冷的). 2. I like spring(春季) because it’s ________(温暖的) and I can see lots of beautiful flowers. 3. The weather here is ________(热的) and ________(干燥的). 4. It’s ________(凉爽的) in autumn(秋季). Ⅱ、对号入座 A: Hi, Cindy. Where’s your brother now? B: 1.______ A: In the park? 2.______ B: No, it isn’t. It’s sunny. 3.______ A: It’s terrible. It’s raining. B: 4.______ A: I’m reading a book but it’s boring. 5.______ B: All right. A. Well, what are you doing now? B. He’s playing soccer in the park. C. Oh, tell your brother to call me when he gets back. D. Is it raining there now? E. What’s the weather like in your city? 【快乐链接】 天气状况（1） Clear 晴朗 Cloudy 多云 Cloudy / Wind 阴时有风 AM Showers 上午阵雨 AM Snow Showers 上午阵雪 AM T-Storms 上午雷暴雨 AM Clouds / PM Sun 上午有云/下午后晴 Clouds Early / Clearing Late 早多云/晚转晴 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 7 It’s raining! Section B 2a -2c (P41) * 教师寄语：It never rains but it pours. 不鸣则已，一鸣惊人。 【学习目标】： 1. 继续学习谈论天气； 2. 继续学习谈论某人正在做什么； 3. 阅读短文，摘录关键信息，提高阅读能力。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片提示，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读新单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. Canada__________________ 2. Europe _____________________ 3. 暑假____________________ 4. 橙汁______________________ 5. 努力学习________________ 6. 玩得开心__________________ 7. 温暖而晴朗_________________ 8. 凉爽且多云____________________ 9. 拜访朋友___________________ 10. 写信给你______________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk Talk about your winter vacation. Step2 Presentation 1. Look at pictures in 2a. Talk about the pictures in pairs. Finish 2a. 2. Look at the postcards in 2b. Guess what they are talking about. 3. Read through the letters quickly. Finish 2c. 4. Check the answers. Step3 Pair-work Talk about your own summer vacation according to the chart in 2c. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结阅读技巧，并尝试根据 2c 中的表格复述文章。 Notes: _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 【快乐阅读】： Weather We often talk about the weather. If we want to know about the weather, We can turn on the radio and listen to the weather report. We can also turn on the TV and watch Weather Forecast. And we can ask other people in two different ways:” What’s the weather like today?” or “How’s the weather today?” Sometimes we can call at 121 for the weather. When it’s cold, we shiver and need to wear warm clothes and scarves. When it’s hot, we need a cool place and want a cold drink. ( ) 1. You can watch Weather Forecast _____. A. by radio B. on TV C. at 121 ( ) 2. You can ask other people”___________” to know about the weather. A. What does the weather like? B. What’s the weather? C. How’s the weather? ( ) 3. The telephone number 121 is for _____. A. the address B. the fire C. the weather ( ) 4. The underlined word “shiver” means “_____” in Chinese. A. 颤抖 B. 出汗 C. 避暑 ( ) 5. We want a cold drink when it’s _____. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 7 It’s raining! Section B 3a - Self Check (P42) * 教师寄语：It never rains but it pours. 不鸣则已，一鸣惊人。 【学习目标】： 1. 谈论假期生活； 2. 写一篇关于你假期生活的笔记。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和文章等，预测新课内容； 2. 自学课文，完成 Self Check 中的练习。 II、翻译官 1. Russian____________________ 2. snowman____________________ 3. 滑冰______________________ 4. 冬季_______________________ 5. 带回家____________________ 6. 拍照_______________________ 7. 我想你。__________________ 8. 还不错。___________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in 1. Read 2b on P41 together. 2. Put the words you learned in different groups. Finish Self Check: Ex.1. 3. Finish Self Check: Ex.2. 4. Finish Self Check: Ex.3. 5. Check the answers. Step2 Presentation 1. Go through the words in the box quickly. 2. Fill in the blanks in the letter with the words. Finish3a. Check the answers. 3. Read the letter together. Step3 Writing 1. Imagine you are on vacation. Write notes about your vacation. Finish3b. 2. Write a postcard to a friend. Finish 3c. 3. Show time: show your postcard to the class. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何写假期笔记。 Notes: ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ 【快乐写作】： 在同样的天气里，不同的人会喜欢做不同的事情。让我们来看一看下面四位同学在阴 雨绵绵的天气里喜欢做什么吧！请根据下表内容提示，用英语写一篇 60 词左右的短文，可 适当发挥。 Name Activity(活动) Jim play computer games Gina watch TV Grace take a walk Bill read books ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ 【快乐链接】 天气状况（3） Smoke 烟雾 Snow and Fog 雾夹雪 Snow Shower 阵雪 Snowflakes 雪花 Sunny Day 晴天 Thunder 雷鸣 Sunny / Wind 晴时有风 T-Storms 雷雨 Snow / Rain Icy Mix 冰雨夹雪 Thunder in the Vicinity 周围有雷雨 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 8 Is there a post office near here? Section A 1a - 1c (P43) * 教师寄语: Life is not all roses. 人生并不是康庄大道。 【学习目标】： 1. 学习常见的地点词汇； 2. 学会在街上问路和指路的表达。 --I s there a… near here? -- Yes, there is. It’s …. 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据单元标题和图片等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读新单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 邮局___________________ 2. 警察局_____________________ 3. 餐馆___________________ 4. 旅馆 ______________________ 5. 街道___________________ 6. 公园_______________________ 7. 银行___________________ 8. 医院_______________________ 9. 在这附近_______________ 10. 付费电话___________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk Try to speak out the names of place you know. Step2 Presentation 1. Learn the new words about place in 1a. 2. Finish 1a. Then check the answers. 3. Look at the picture in 1a and learn the drills: --Is there a … near here? -- Yes, there is. It’s …. Step3 Listening Listen and finish 1b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Practice the conversations in 1a .Then make your own conversations. II、合作交流 Group work: 总结归纳本课学的地点词汇。 Places: _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： Ⅰ、完美呈现 1. My mother works in a __________(医院). 2. Mike lives __________(在……附近) our school. 3. There is a new__________(旅馆)on Bridge Street. 4. –Is there a__________(银行)in our town? --Yes, there is. 5. Where is the__________(邮政)office. II、对号入座 park post office library supermarket restaurant 1. If (如果) you want to borrow a book, you can go to the __________. 2. If you want to have fun, you can go to the __________. 3. If you want to go shopping, you can go to the ___________. 4. If you are hungry, you can have a meal in the __________. 5. If you want to mail(邮寄) a letter, you can go to the __________. 【快乐链接】 城市建筑物(1) traffic light 交通灯 national highway 国道 public lavatory 公共厕所 public telephone 公共电话 zoo 动物园 botanical garden 植物园 art museum 美术馆 museum 博物馆 station 车站 post office 邮局 stadium 运动场 fairground, fun fair 游乐园 university 大学 school 学校 library 图书馆 theatre 剧院（美语：theater） monument 纪念碑 art gallery 画廊 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 8 Is there a post office near here? Section A 2a -2d (P44) *教师寄语：Life is not all roses. 人生并不是康庄大道。 【学习目标】： 1. 学习常用的方位介词/词组；2. 学会描述某地的位置。xKb1.C o m 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据课本图片和对话等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读新单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 在……旁边_______________ 2. 在……中间_______________ 3. 在……前面_______________ 4. 在……后面_______________ 5. 在……上面_______________ 6. 在……对面_______________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Revision Review the vocabularies of places in 1a. Step2 Presentation 1. Look at the picture in 2a. 2. Go through the sentences in 2a. Finish2a. Check the answers. Step3 Listening 1. Go through the sentences in 2b. 2. Listen to the tape. Finish2b. 3. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work 1. Ask and answer questions with your partner. Finish 2c. 2. Role-play the conversation in 2d. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何描述某地的位置，并模仿 2d 编写对话。 Notes: ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、完美呈现 1. Li Lei sits ________ ________ (紧挨着) Liu Mei. 2. There is a restaurant ________ (在……上) Center Street. 3. Tom is standing ________ ________ (在……对面) the shop. 4. I want to plant a tree ________ _________ ________ (在……前面) our house. 5. There is a park ________ (在……后面) our school. II、你来我往 A: 1.__________________________. B: Yes. How can I help you? A: 2. __________________________. Is there a hotel near here? B: 3. __________________________. It’s on Center Street. It’s across from the bank. A: 4. __________________________? B: It’s not too far from here. I can walk with you. A: Oh, that’s great! Thank you so much. B: 5. __________________________. 【快乐链接】 城市建筑物(2) cathedral 大教堂 church 教堂 law court 法院 town hall 市政厅 newsstand 报摊 junk shop 旧货店 market 市场，集市 bazaar 市场 building 楼房 house 屋子 shop, store 商店 department stores 百货公司 skyscraper 摩天楼 flat 栖身单元，套房 extension 范围，扩展 Chinese quarter 唐人街 Stock Exchange 股票交易所 Commodity Exchange 商品交易所 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 8 Is there a post office near here? Section A Grammar Focus-3c (P45) * 教师寄语：Life is not all roses. 人生并不是康庄大道。 【学习目标】： 1、总结归纳 Section A 部分知识重点； 2、学会运用 Section A 部分所学知识。 【体验学习】： 预习交流 1. 根据 Grammar Focus, 归纳 Section A 部分知识重点； 2. 自学课文，试着完成 3a,3b,3c 的练习。 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Grammar Focus 1. Give a summary about it. 2. Try to recite it. Step2 Presentation 1. Look at the map in 3a. Try to answer the questions. 2. Check the answers and practice the conversations. Step3 Group work 1. Look at the map in 3a. Try to write three sentences at least. 2. Show your sentences to the class. Step4 Game Work in groups. Finish 3c. II、合作交流 Group work: 总结归纳 Section A 部分知识重点。 1.表示地点的词汇： _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ 2.方位介词或词组: _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ 3.表示问路和指路的句子： ______________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： Ⅰ、句型转换 1. Sun Hotel is across from Star Supermarket. (对划线部分提问) ________ _________ Sun Hotel? 2. In this photo, I see Lily is behind Mike. (改为同义句) In this photo, I see Mike is ________ ________ ________ Lily. 3. There are some trees in this picture. (改为一般疑问句) ________ ________ ________ trees in this picture? 4. –Are there two students in the classroom? (作肯定回答) --________, ________ ________. 5. There are some CDs on the desk. (改为否定句) There ________ ________ CDs on the desk. Ⅱ、胸有成竹 1. Is ________ a post office near here? 2. Look! The market is ________ Center Street. 3. The store is across ________ the park. 4. There is a bookshop next ________ the hotel. 5. Beijing is in the __________ of China. 【快乐链接】 城市建筑物(3) locality 所在地 hole, dump 狭小破旧的住房 shantytown 贫民区 slums 贫民窟，贫民区 outskirts 郊区 suburb 近郊区 urban 市区的 residential area 居民区，住宅区 district 区 municipal 市的，市政的 municipality 市政当局 shopping centre 贸易区 metropolis 大都市 centre 市中央（美语：center） capital 首都 city 城 市 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 8 Is there a post office near here? Section B 1a - 1e (P46) * 教师寄语：Man struggles upwards. 人往高处走。 【学习目标】： 1. 了解常见的交通标志； 2. 学会根据地图描述某个地点的具体位置。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和对话等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读新单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1.左转 ______________________ 2.右转 ___________________________ 3.在左边_____________________ 4.在右边 _________________________ 5.直行 ______________________ 6.在第一个路口____________________ 7.在某人的左边_______________ 8.在某人的右边____________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Revision Review the Grammar Focus in Section A . Step2 Presentation 1. Learn and remember the signs of transportation in 1a. Finish1a. Step3 Listening 1. Look at the map in 1b. 2. Listen to the tape. Finish 1b&1c. Then check the answers. Step4 Pair work Ask and answer in pairs. Finish 1d. II、合作交流 Group work: 总结归纳本课学的知识重点。 1. Transportation signs (交通标志): _______________________________________________________ 2. 指路的英文词组： _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 ( ) 1. The girl sits next ____ Nancy. A. at B. in C. to ( ) 2. Just go straight and turn ____. The hotel is ____. A. right; on the right B. on the right; right C. on the right; to the right ( ) 3. –Is there a pay phone near here? --Yes, ____. A. it is B. there is C. there are Ⅱ、译展身手 1. 这附近有银行吗？ ________ ________ a bank near here? 2. 付费电话在哪儿？ ________ ________ the pay phone? 3. 银行就在超市的旁边。 The bank is ________ ________ the supermarket. 4. 沿着大桥街走，在新公园向左转。 ________ ________ Bridge Street and ________ ________ at New Park. 5. 餐馆就在你的右边。 The restaurant is ________ ________ ________. 【快乐链接】 交通标志大搜索 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 8 Is there a post office near here? Section B 2a -2c (P47) * 教师寄语：Man struggles upwards. 人往高处走。 【学习目标】： 1. 学会看地图描述某个地点的具体位置； 2. 阅读短文，回答问题，提高阅读能力。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片提示，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读新单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 十字路口 ________________ 2. 街区；街坊 _______________ 3. 免费的 __________________ 4. 到处；大约 _______________ 5. 阳光 ____________________ 6. 空气 _____________________ 7. 爬 ______________________ 8. 花（时间、钱等）__________ 9. 公路 ____________________ 10. 街道 _____________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 xKb1.C o m Step1 Free talk Talk about your neighborhood. Step2 Presentation 1. Look at the words in 2a. Finish2a. 2. Look at the maps in 2b. Guess where they are talking about. 3. Read through the passages quickly. Finish2b. 4. Read the passages again. Finish 2c. 5. Check the answers. Step3 Pair-work Ask and answer according to the message in 2c in pairs. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结阅读技巧，并尝试根据 2c 中的表格复述文章。 Notes: _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 【快乐阅读】： Dear Frank, I’m very glad you are arriving in my city at 3:00 p.m., this Saturday. Now let me tell you the way to the White Cloud Restaurant. I will (将要) meet you there. Take a taxi from the bus station and go down New Bridge Avenue. Go across the big bridge. When you see a bank, turn right and go through Bank Street. You will pass three one-way avenues: Sixth Avenue, Seventh Avenue and Eighth Avenue. When you see a big McDonald’s, turn left. Then go along Green Avenue until (直 到) you see New Park. Turn left and go down Center Street. The White Cloud Restaurant is on your right. I hope you can have a good trip. Yours, Mike ( ) 1. Mike will meet Frank in a ______. A. restaurant B. bank C. McDonald’s ( ) 2. Frank goes to Mike’s city by ______. A. taxi B. bus C. air ( ) 3. The big bridge is on ______. A. Center Street B. Bank Street C. New Bridge Avenue ( ) 4. The White Cloud Restaurant is ______. A. on the left of New Park B. on the right of Green Avenue C. on the right of Center Street、 【快乐链接】 交通标志大搜索（2） 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 8 Is there a post office near here? Section B 3a - Self Check (P48) * 教师寄语：Man struggles upwards. 人往高处走。 【学习目标】： 1. 谈论某个地点的具体位置； 2. 写一篇介绍你家周围环境的短文。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和文章等，预测新课内容； 2. 自学课文，完成 Self Check 中的练习。 II、翻译官 1. 享受；喜爱 ______________ 2. 钱 _________________ 3. 容易地 __________________ 4. 忙碌的 _____________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in 1. Read 2b on P47 together. 2. Put the words you learned in different blanks. Finish Self Check: Ex.1. 3. Finish Self Check: Ex.2. 4. Finish Self Check: Ex.3. 5. Check the answers. Step2 Presentation 1. Go through the words in the box quickly. 2. Fill in the blanks in the passage with the words. Finish3a. Check the answers. 3. Read the passage together. Step3 Writing 1. Draw a map of your neighborhood. 2. Write a passage about your neighborhood according to the questions in the box. Finish3b. 3. Show time: show your passage to the class. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何描述个地方的具体位置。 Notes: ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】 Ⅰ、最佳搭档 ( ) 1. I hope you have fun. ( ) 2. Where’s the park? ( ) 3. Thank you very much. ( ) 4. Is there a pay phone near here? ( ) 5. Is the bank next to the supermarket? A. Yes, it is. B. Thank you. C. Yes, there is. D. You are welcome. E. On Park Street. Ⅱ、对号入座 on to in across with 1. Don’t go ______ the street when the light is red. 2. Is there a park ______ the neighborhood? 3. Zhang Jie’s uncle has a big house ______ a small garden. 4. Excuse me, sir. Do you know the way ______ Happy School? 5. Go down Sun Street and the small market is ______ your right. 【快乐链接】 交通标志大搜索（3） 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 9 What does he look like? Section A 1a - 1c (P49) * 教师寄语: Clothes do not make the man. 人不在衣装。 【学习目标】： 1. 学习描述人外貌的词汇； 2. 学会描述人的外貌。 --What does he/she look like? -- He/She is…, and he/she has…. 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据单元标题和图片等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读新单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 长发___________________ 2. 短发_____________________ 3. 直发___________________ 4. 卷发_____________________ 5. 高的___________________ 6. 矮的_____________________ 7. 重的___________________ 8. 廋的_____________________ 9. 中等个子_______________ 10. 中等身材_________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk Try to speak out the words of people’s looks you know. Step2 Presentation 1. Learn the new words about people’s looks in 1a. 2. Finish 1a. Then check the answers. 3. Look at the picture in 1a and learn the drills: --What does he look like? Is he short or tall? --Well, he’s really…. And he has…. Step3 Listening Listen and finish 1b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Practice the conversations in 1a .Then make your own conversations. II、合作交流 Group work: 总结归纳本课学的描述人外貌的词汇。 Looks: _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： Ⅰ、完美呈现 1. Sun Dong is very __________ (廋的). 2. He’s of _________ (中等的) build. 3. He is short and has __________ (卷的) hair. 4. Mary’s hair is long and __________ (直的). 5. –What is the __________ (高度) of the tree? -- About three meters. II、对比空间 1. My brother is __________, but I’m short. 2. Do you like straight or ___________ hair? 3. I don’t like white. My favorite color is ___________. 4. Mary is very heavy, but her sister is very __________. Ⅲ、译展身手 1. 你爸爸长什么样？ _________________________________________________________? 2. 你爸爸是什么样的人？ _________________________________________________________? 【快乐链接】 描述人外貌的词汇 (1) short 矮 tall 高 thin 瘦 overweight 胖 slim 苗条 plump 丰满 tubby 矮胖 muscular 强壮 skinny 太瘦了 medium height 不胖不瘦 plain 长的一般 good-looking 长的好看 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 9 What does he look like? Section A 2a -2d (P50) *教师寄语: Clothes do not make the man. 人不在衣装。 【学习目标】： 1. 学会描述某人的外貌。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据课本图片和对话等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读新单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 今天 _____________________ 2. 今晚 _____________________ 3. 电影院 ___________________ 4. 戏剧院 __________________ 5. 一点; 少量 _______________ 6. 少；几乎没有 _____________ 7. 一杯牛奶__________________ 8. 一副眼镜 __________________ 9. 戴眼镜 ___________________ 10. 去看电影 _________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Revision Review the vocabularies of people’s looks in 1a. Step2 Listening 1. Go through the questions in 2a. 2. Listen to the tape. Finish 2a & 2b. 3. Check the answers. Step3 Pair work Work in pairs. Finish 2c. Step4 Role-play 1. Role-play the conversation in 2d. II、合作交流 xKb1.C o m Group work: 分析总结如何描述某人的外貌，并模仿 2d 编写对话。 Notes: ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 ( ) 1. She is of ______ medium height and she has ______ long hair. A. a; a B. a; / C. /; / ( ) 2. -- ______ is your favorite teacher like? --She is very friendly. A. How B. What C. Who ( ) 3. He is short, but he looks _______ thin. A. a little B. a little of C. a lot of II、你来我往 A: Hello, Tom. 1. _____________________________________? B: Yes. We ‘re meeting at six, right? A: Yeah. 2. __________________________. My friend Bob is going, too. Just meet him in front of the cinema first. B: Oh, but I don’t know him. 3. __________________________? A: Well, he has brown hair and wears glasses. B: OK. 4. ______________________________? A: He isn’t tall or short. He’s of medium height. B: OK, sure. 5. __________________________. 【快乐链接】 描述人外貌的词汇 (2) nose: high-bridged 高鼻梁 big 大的 high 高的 pointed 尖鼻子 straight 挺直的 eyes: sexy 性感的 watery 水汪汪的 deep-sunken 深陷的 bright 明亮的 face: rosy 红润的 beautiful 美丽的 handsome 英俊的 well-featured 五官端正的 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 9 What does he look like? Section A Grammar Focus-3d (P51) * 教师寄语：Clothes do not make the man. 人不在衣装。 【学习目标】： 1、总结归纳 Section A 部分知识重点； 2、学会运用 Section A 部分所学知识。 【体验学习】： Ⅰ、预习交流 1. 根据 Grammar Focus, 归纳 Section A 部分知识重点； 2. 自学课文，试着完成 3a,3b,3c,3d 的练习。 Ⅱ、翻译官 1. 男演员 _________________ 2. 女演员 _________________ 3. 英俊的 _________________ 4. 漂亮的 _________________ 5. 某人 ___________________ 6. 人们 ___________________ 【课堂导学】: I、新课呈现 Step1 Grammar Focus 1. Give a summary about it. 2. Try to recite it. Step2 Presentation 1. Look at the words in 3a. Try to finish 3a. 2. Go through the conversation in 3b quickly. Finish3b. 3. Check the answers. Step3 Pair work 1. Look at the questions in 3c. Try to write down your answers. 2. Tell your answers to your partner. Step4 Game Work in groups. Finish3d. II、合作交流 Group work: 总结归纳 Section A 部分知识重点。 1.描述某人外貌的词汇：____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ 2.询问某人外貌的句子:_____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ 【自主检测】： Ⅰ、最佳选择 be & have 1. My father ______ of medium build and ______ a beard (胡子). 2. David ______ short. But his sister ______ tall. 3. I ______ of medium height and ______ short straight black hair. 4. Tom’s hair _______ short. But his eyes ______ big. 5. My new friend ______ thin and tall. 6. Linda ______ curly hair. Ⅱ、对号入座 A: What does your friend look like? B: 1. ______. And she is of medium height. A: How about her hair? B: 2. ______. A: Is she a little bit heavy? B: No, she isn’t. 3. ______ A: 4. ______. B: Yes, she does. A: 5.______. B: Her name is Alice. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: _______ Unit 9 What does he look like? Section B 1a - 1e (P52) * 教师寄语：You can't judge a tree by its bark. 人不可貌相。 【学习目标】： 1. 继续学习描述人外貌的词汇； 2. 学会描述某个人的外貌特征。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和对话等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读新单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1.黑发 ______________________ 2.金发 _____________________ 3.大鼻子_____________________ 4.小嘴巴 ___________________ 5.长脸 ______________________ 6.圆脸 _____________________ 7.大眼睛 ____________________ 8.戴眼镜____________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Revision Review the Grammar Focus in Section A . Step2 Presentation 1. Look at the pictures in 1a. A. What’s her name? B. She is beautiful. C. She has short curly brown hair. D. Does she wear glasses? E. She is of medium build. 2. Learn and remember the words of people’s looks in 1a. Finish1a. 3. Talk about the famous people’s looks you know. Finish1b. Step3 Listening 1. Look at the picture in 1c. 2. Listen to the tape. Finish 1c&1d. Then check the answers. Step4 Pair work Describe a famous people you know. Finish1e. Show your description to your partner. II、合作交流 Group work: 总结归纳本课学的知识重点。 描述人外貌的短语: ___________________________________________ ___________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、图文配对 ( ) 1. He is my favorite singer. He comes from Taiwan, China. He has small eyes and short black hair. ( ) 2. She is a pretty girl. She has big eyes and long straight black hair. She is very popular in China now. ( ) 3. She is heavy and has short hair. She always wears glasses. She sings well. Many people like her and her songs. 【快乐链接】 描述人外貌的词汇 (3) mouth: sensuous 有美感的 small 小的 big 大的 fine 好看的 mean 薄的 ears: thick 厚实的 drooping 耷拉的 cauliflower 招风的 long-lobed 耳朵很长的 figure: slender 苗条的 fat 胖的 small 细的 plump 非常丰满的 muscularity 肌肉发达的 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 9 What does he look like? Section B 2a -2c (P53) * 教师寄语：You can't judge a tree by its bark. 人不可貌相。 【学习目标】： 1. 学会描述某人的外貌特征； 2. 阅读短文，摘录信息，提高阅读能力。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片提示，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读新单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. crime ____________________ 2. criminal ______________ 3. 艺术家 ___________________ 4. 不同的 ________________ 5. 另一的 ___________________ 6. 真正的 ________________ 7. 每个 _____________________ 8. 描述 __________________ 9. 同样的方式________________ 10. 最后 __________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Free talk Talk about your favorite friend’s looking. Step2 Presentation 1. Look at the words in 2a. Finish2a. 2. Look at the pictures in 2b. Try to describe them. 3. Read through the passage quickly. Finish2b. 4. Read the passage again. Finish 2c. 5. Check the answers. Step3 Pair-work Ask and answer according to the message in 2c in pairs. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结阅读技巧，并尝试根据 2b 中的图片复述文章。 Notes: _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 【快乐阅读】： I’m Tom. My best friends are John and Ann. We do many things together. John lives near my house and we are in the same class. He’s fifteen years old and he’s tall and slim. He has blond hair and blue eyes. He’s polite and very clever. He’s very good at math and he sometimes helps me with my homework. He usually wears jeans and a T-shirt. We also play basketball at a nearby(附 近的) park together and sometimes we play video games at my house after school. Our friend Ann isn’t in our school. She’s short and slim with straight brown hair and brown eyes. She’s a little bit shy. We all have kung fu lesson every Tuesday and Friday afternoon. Ann is really good at kung fu. We call her the “kung fu kid”. She sometimes plays basketball with us, too. She often wears a dress, a T-shirt and a baseball cap. The three of us have great fun together. ( ) 1. Who is good at math? A. Tom B. Ann C. John ( ) 2. Where do Tom and John play video games? A. At John’s house B. At Tom’s house C. At Ann’s house ( ) 3. What do the three children do together? A. Play baseball B. Play basketball C. Play video games ( ) 4. What clothes do John and Ann like to wear? A. T-shirt B. Jeans C. Jackets ( ) 5. When do the children have kung fu lesson? A. Every Thursday and Wednesday. B. Every Tuesday and Wednesday afternoon. C. Every Tuesday and Friday afternoon. 【快乐链接】 名人名言 One false step will make a great difference. 失之毫厘，缪之千里。 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 9 What does he look like? Section B 3a - Self Check (P54) * 教师寄语：You can't judge a tree by its bark. 人不可貌相。 【学习目标】： 1. 谈论某人的外貌特征； 2. 写一篇介绍你好朋友的短文。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和文章等，预测新课内容； 2. 自学课文，完成 Self Check 中的练习。 II、翻译官 1. 牛仔裤 ______________ 2. 身高 __________________ 3. 身材 ________________ 4. 首先 __________________ 5. 很酷 ________________ 6. 其他特征 ______________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in 1. Read 2b on P53 together. 2. Put the words you learned in different blanks. Finish Self Check: Ex.1. 3. Finish Self Check: Ex.2. 4. Check the answers. Step2 Presentation 1. Go through the words in the box quickly. 2. Fill in the blanks in the passage with the words. Finish3a. Check the answers. 3. Read the passage together. Step3 Writing 1. Think about the questions in 3b. 2. Write a passage about your best friend. Finish3b. 3. Show time: show your passage to the class. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何描述某人的外貌特征。 Notes: ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ 【快乐写作】: 在一次英语角活动中，大家谈论的话题是家庭成员。请根据下表中的提示，向大 家介绍一下你的妹妹。 姓名 Mary 年龄 9 岁 外貌 瘦， 中等身材， 黑色的卷发 性格 友善但害羞 爱好 看电视和看书 要求：1.60 词左右。 2.内容包含表中所有信息。 3.语句通顺、语意连贯。 4.参考词汇: thin, of medium build , curly black hair, friendly, shy, watch TV, read books…. _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 【快乐链接】 白色人种 白种人又称欧亚人种或高加索人种，是世界上人口最多的人种，占世界总人口的 54%左 右。其特征是肤色浅淡；柔软波状的头发，头发颜色分为金发、红发、天然白发（较少见出 现在北欧）、棕发、黑发；眼色碧蓝、碧绿或棕色；毛发较浓密；颧骨不高突；颚骨较平； 鼻子窄而高；唇薄或适中。它们在全世界分布较广泛。其主要集中分布地方是欧洲，西亚、 非洲北部以及北美洲、大洋洲、南美洲各国中白人比例最高的国家是阿根廷。世界上还有很 多民族是欧罗巴的混血民族，占有一定的欧罗巴血统，比如亚洲的图兰人种（哈萨克、维吾 尔、塔吉克等）。 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 10 I’d like some noodles. Section A 1a — 1c (P55) * 教师寄语：An apple a day keeps the doctor away. 一天一苹果，医生远离我。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、学习常用食物词汇； 2、学会如何预定食物。 --What would you like? -- I’d like some…./I’m not sure yet. 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据单元标题和图片等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 想要,喜欢_________________ 2. 牛肉面____________________ 4. 鸡肉_____________________ 5. 羊肉 ______________________ 3. 卷心菜___________________ 6. 胡萝卜_____________________ 7. 土豆(复数) _______________ 8. 西红柿(复数) _______________ 9. special ___________________ 10. 我还没想好。_______________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Brainstorming(头脑风暴) Try to speak out the names of food you know. Step2 Presentation 1. Learn the new words about food in 1a. 2. Finish 1a, then check the answers. 3. Look at the picture in 1a and learn the drills: --What would you like? -- I’d like some…. Step3 Listening Listen and finish 1b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Practice the conversations in 1a .Then make your own conversations. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何预定食物，并练习造句。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 ( ) 1. – What’s her favorite vegetable? --__________. A. Eggs. B. Bananas. C. Cabbages. ( ) 2. Dale likes _______ very much. A. tomato B. tomatoes C. tomatos ( ) 3. What would you like _______ breakfast? A. for B. on C. at II、完美呈现 1. Some _________ (beef) is in the box. 2. Mutton _________ (be) my favorite food. 3. Bring me some __________ (orange), and I want to make orange juice. 4. I like rice. But my sister ____________ (not like) it. Ⅲ、连词成句 1. you, like, what, would (?) ___________________________________________________________ 2. noodles, like, please, the, I’d , beef (.) ___________________________________________________________ 3. sure, not, I yet, am (.) ___________________________________________________________ 【快乐链接】 英汉对对碰：Match each word with the right Chinese meaning. mango 黄瓜 pepper 西瓜 eggplant 芒果 cucumber 辣椒 watermelon 茄子 jelly 花生 peanut 蘑菇 lollipop 果冻 chocolate 棒棒糖 mushroom 巧克力 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 10 I’d like some noodles. Section A 2a — 2d (P56) * 教师寄语：An apple a day keeps the doctor away. 一天一苹果，医生远离我。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 继续学习如何预定食物,并会表达自己的喜好和选择。 --May I take/ have your order? -- (Yes.) I’d like some…. --What kind of noodles would you like? -- I’d like beef noodles, please. --What size would you like? -- Large, please. 【体验学习】： I、 预习交流 1. 根据图片和对话等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 您可以点菜了吗？_________________ 2.小,中,大 ____________________ 3. What size…? ______________________ 4. 一大碗…___________________ 5. gongbao chicken___________________ 6. 麻婆豆腐___________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Brainstorming Try to speak out the food you know. Step2 Presentation 1. Learn more food and the new words in 2a. 2. Look at the pictures in 2a, try to ask and learn. eg: --What kind of noodles would you like? -- I’d like beef noodles, please. --What size would you like? -- Small/Medium/Large, please. Step3 Listening 1. Listen to 2a and check the food you hear. 2. Go through the sentences in 2b. 3. Listen and finish 2b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work 1. Ask and answer questions with your partner. Finish 2c. 2. Role-play the conversations in 2d. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何预定食物，并模仿 2d 编写对话。 Notes:__________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、找朋友 ( ) 1. I would like a cup of tea. A. like B. want C. have ( ) 2. China is a large country. A. very big B. very small C. not big or small. ( ) 3. --What would you like? -- A cup of juice, please. A. a kind of food B. a kind of vegetables C. a kind of drink II、你来我往 A: Good morning, sir! 1.________________ B: Yes. I’d like some noodles. A: 2. _________________ B: Beef noodles, please. A: What size would you like? B: 3. _________________ A: Anything else? B: No, thanks. 4.___________________ A: Six yuan. 5.___________________ B: Yes. I will eat here. A: Please wait and it will be OK soon. 【快乐链接】 你知道这些有关食物的短语和句子吗？让我们一起来做快乐的收集者吧！ * go bananas 发疯的 * the big cheese 很有影响力的人 * as cool as a cucumber 非常冷静，镇定自若 * couch potato 极为懒惰的人;成天躺着或坐在沙发上看电视的人 * You can't have your cake and eat it, too. 鱼与熊掌不可兼得。 * If life gives you lemons, make lemonade. 意思是在困境中也要做到最好。 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 10 I’d like some noodles. Section A Grammar Focus— 3c (P57) * 教师寄语：An apple a day keeps the doctor away. 一天一苹果，医生远离我。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、总结归纳 Section A 部分语法重点； 2、并将所学知识学以致用。 【体验学习】： 预习交流 1. 根据 Grammar Focus, 归纳 Section A 部分语法重点； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Grammar Focus 1. Give a summary about it. 2. Try to recite it. Step2 Presentation 1. Go through sentences in 3a. Complete the conversation. 2. Check the answers and practice the conversation. Step4 Group work 1. Write questions and answers using the words in brackets. Finish 3b. 2. Work in groups. Who would like the food in 3c? Write their names on the cards above the food. 3. According to 3a, 3b, 3c, make your own conversations. 4. Show time: act out your conversations. eg: --Anna, What would you like to eat? -- I’d like beef noodles with carrots. --What size would you like? --A medium bowl, please. --Are there any …? -- …. II、合作交流 1. Group work: 总结归纳 Section A 部分语法重点 Notes:_________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________ 2. Group work: 单词归类 可数名词：____________________________________________________ 不可数名词：__________________________________________________ 可数名词&不可数名词：_________________________________________ 【自主检测】： 完形填空 It’s 12 o’clock. A man goes into a restaurant for _ _1 _ . “Hi! Can I __ 2 _ you?” a waiter says. “I’d like some French fries, a __ 3 and a medium Coke,” says the man. “__ 4 _ else ?” asks the waiter. “No,” the man answers. “That’s _ _5 . ” “For here or to go?” asks the waiter. “To go, please,” says the man. The waiter puts the food into a bag. Then the man goes away __ 6 _ the bag. “Have a nice day,” the waiter says. The man walks to the park. He sits down and opens the bag. There _ _7 _ a hamburger, some French fries and a Coke. There is also some _ _8 _ in the bag. “That’s the money for my lunch,” says the man. Then he goes back to the _ _ 9 _ because he doesn’t want to __10_ his lunch for free. He is really a good man. ( ) 1. A. breakfast B. lunch C. dinner ( ) 2. A. ask B. call C. help ( ) 3. A. hamburger B. dumpling C. tomato ( ) 4. A. Anyone B. Anything C. Something ( ) 5. A. all B. her C. his ( ) 6. A. of B. with C. from ( ) 7. A. am B. is C. are ( ) 8. A. money B. beef C. cabbage ( ) 9. A. park B. house C. restaurant ( ) 10. A. get B. give C. play 【快乐链接】 Riddle (谜语) --- 打食物名 1.What kind of dog doesn’t bite or bark? --- hot dog 2.What is the smallest room in the world? --- mushroom 3.What table is in the field? --- vegetable 4.What stays hot even if put it in a fridge? ---pepper 5.What is the only vegetable that will make you cry? --- onion 6. My first letter is in "tea", not in "sea". My second letter is in "those", not in "these" My third letter is in "fine", not in "nine" My forth letter is in "buy", not in "boy". ---tofu 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 10 I’d like some noodles. Section B 1a — 1e (P58) * 教师寄语：We are what we eat. 吃什么是什么(身体健康状况)。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 继续学习如何预定食物,并会表达自己的喜好和选择。 -- I like dumplings, fish and orange juice. -- I don’t like onions, green tea or porridge. 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和对话等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 橙汁_____________ 2. 绿茶___________ 3. black tea __________ 4. 肉 ______________ 5. 汤 ____________ 6. 粥 ______________ 7. onion ____________ 8. 饺子___________ 9. order form_________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in Grammar Focus Step2 Presentation (1) Learn and finish 1a. Then try to remember the names of food. (2) Game: Quick action about the food. eg: A: 汤.  B: soup. (3) Make sentences as following. Finish 1b. -- I like dumplings, fish and orange juice. -- I don’t like onions, green tea or porridge. Step3 Listening (1) Go through the food order form in 1c. (2) Listen and complete the food order form. Then check the answers. Step4 Pair work Ask and answer questions according to the order form. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结 and 和 or 的联系区别,并举例说明。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 ( ) 1. Grace doesn’t like green tea, onions _____ dumplings A. but B. and C. or ( ) 2. We have some ______ here and we can cook ______ soup. A. egg, egg B. eggs, egg C. eggs, eggs ( ) 3. -- ______ rice would you like? -- Small, please. A. What kind of B. What size C. What size bowl of Ⅲ、最佳选择 salad, medium, order, juice, address Maria arrives home very late. She is tired. So she telephoned Pizza Express to ___________ some pizzas. She doesn’t want a big one. She wants a _________ size pizza and one small orange __________. She says she likes ___________, too. She tells them her ____________. They will send her pizzas in half an hour. 【快乐链接】 快餐词汇 肯德基 KFC 麦当劳 Mc Donald’s 巨无霸 big Mac 番茄酱 ketchup 汉堡 hamburger / burger 芝士汉堡 cheese burger 薯条 French Fries / potato chips 苹果派 apple pie 全家桶: Family Big Box 鸡米花 popcorn chicken 辣翅 hot wing 烤鸡翅 roast chicken wing 百事 Pepsi-Cola 七喜 7-Up 蛋挞 egg tart 甜筒 soft cone 三明治 sandwich 奶昔 milk shake 吸管 straw 纸巾 paper towel 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 10 I’d like some noodles. Section B 2a —2c (P59) * 教师寄语：We are what we eat. 吃什么是什么(身体健康状况)。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 根据文章找寻关键信息，提高阅读能力。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和文章标题等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 全世界__________________ 2. 许愿 ___________________ 3. 生日蛋糕________________ 4. 吹蜡烛__________________ 5. the number of_____________ 6. 切碎 ___________________ 7. symbol __________________ 8. 受欢迎 _________________ 9. 相同不同_____________ 10. bring good luck to _________ 【课堂导学】： I、 新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in Question1: When is your birthday? Question2: What do you do or eat on your birthday? Step2 Presentation (1) Read the article about food traditions and complete the chart. (2) Read the article again and answer the questions in 2b. (3) Group work: read the ad again, try to find the key points. Then say them out one by one. eg: <1> around the world = all over the world <2> the number of… <3> …. Step3 Consolidation Read the key points and the article. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结阅读技巧，并尝试根据 2b 中的表格复述文章。 Notes:_____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 【快乐阅读】： A Special gift Alan is eleven years old. And it is his first time to come to China to visit his grandparents. Today is Sunday. It’s his eleventh birthday. He gets up early and he wants to buy some food for his birthday party in the afternoon. He sees a big bowl of noodles on the table when he comes out of the his bedroom. It is a bowl of egg and tomato noodles. Alan usually eats bread for breakfast in America. He likes egg and tomato noodles, but he wants to know why Grandma cooks noodles this morning. “It is your birthday today,” says Grandma. “In China, eating noodles on your birthday means you can live longer. We call noodles changshou noodles. I hope you live a happy and healthy life.” “Thanks, Grandma. I think it’s the first special gift I get for my birthday,” says Alan. ( ) 1. How old is Alan? A. He is 10. B. He is 11. C. He is 12. ( ) 2. When is Alan’s birthday party? A. On Saturday morning. B. On Saturday afternoon. C. On Sunday afternoon. ( ) 3.What does Alan see on the table? A. A big bowl. B. A bowl of noodles. C. A tomato. ( ) 4. What does Alan often have for breakfast in America? A. Bread and milk. B. Fruit and milk. C. Egg noodles. ( ) 5. From the passage, we know that _____________. A. Alan’s mother cooks noodles for him B. Alan thinks his grandma’s gift for him is special C. Alan’s grandma doesn’t want to have the birthday party 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 10 I’d like some noodles. Section B 3a — Self Check (P60) * 教师寄语：We are what we eat. 吃什么是什么(身体健康状况)。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 设计并写出自己的餐馆广告。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和文章等，预测新课内容； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. Pancake House________________ 2. 不同种类___________________ 3. 美味的 ____________________ 4. fly (n.& v.) ________________ 5. 别担心！___________________ 6. put on your glasses ____________ 【课堂导学】： I、 新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in (1) Read 2b on P59 together. (2) Put the words you learned in different groups. Finish Self Check: Ex.1. (3) Finish Self Check: Ex.2: Complete the sentences with the there be structure. (4) Write a conversation with the help of the clues. Step2 Presentation (1) Go through the words in the box quickly. (2) Fill in the blanks in the ad with the words. Finish 3a. Check the answers. (3) Read the ad together. Step3 Writing Group work: 1. Imagine you have a restaurant. Write the foods and their prices. 2. Write an ad for your restaurant. Finish 3b. 3. Show time: show your ad to the class. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何设计并写出自己的餐馆广告。 Notes:________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ 【快乐阅读】： Mc Donald’s If you are busy and want to have a quick lunch, you can go to the Mc Donald’s. You can also take it home to eat. Hamburger: $1.5 each French fries: $ 1 each bag Fried chicken leg: $ 2 each (on weekdays) $ 1.5 each (on weekends) Telephone: 7645321 Cici Dessert House After dinner, would you like some dessert? Please come to Cici Dessert House. The dessert is great. And also you can enjoy music here. Strawberry ice cream: 7 RMB each Orange juice: 5 RMB each glass Green tea: 10 RMB each cup Telephone: 3678905 Jiahe Dumpling House Do you like eating dumplings? Please come to Jiahe Dumpling House. There are different kinds of dumplings and there are really nice. Beef and onion dumplings: 10 yuan for 20. Chicken and tomato dumplings: 10 yuan for 30. Telephone: 3227228 Lanzhou Noodle Room In China, many people like noodles for lunch. In our room, you can eat two kinds of noodles. Chicken and cabbage noodles: 10 yuan for a small bowl and 16 yuan for a large bowl Egg and tomato noodles: 8 yuan for a small bowl and 12 yuan for a large bowl Telephone: 4876590 ( ) 1. How much is each fried chicken leg on Saturday? A. $1.5. B. $2. C. $2.5. ( ) 2. How many kinds of dumplings are there in Jiahe Dumpling House? A. Two. B. Three. C. Four. ( ) 3.You can call _______ if you like eating noodles. A. 7645321 B. 3227228 C. 4876590 ( ) 4. If you eat two small bowls of egg and tomato noodles, you need to pay_____. A. ￥10. B. ￥16. C. ￥20 ( ) 5. Which of the following is true? A. You can call 3227228 for some orange juice. B. You can enjoy music in Cici Dessert House. C. Green tea is 5 RMB each cup on Sunday. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 11 How was your school trip? Section A 1a — 1c (P61) * 教师寄语：A thousand mile trip begins with one step. 千里之行，始于足下。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 学习一般过去时；学会谈论过去事件。 --Did you …? – Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t. 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据单元标题和图片等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. school trip_________________ 2. 散步______________________ 4. 骑马_____________________ 5. 喂鸡______________________ 3. milk a cow ________________ 6. 照相______________________ 7.与农夫交谈________________ 8. quite a lot __________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Lead-in Question1: What do you often do on weekends? Question2: What did you do last weekend? Step2 Presentation 1. Learn the new words and phrases in 1a. 2. Finish 1a, then check the answers. 3. Look at the conversation, and learn the drills: --Did you see any cows? -- Yes, I did. I saw quite a lot. --Did you ride a horse? -- No, I didn’t. But…. Step3 Listening Listen and finish 1b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Practice the conversation in 1c . Then make your own conversations. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结一般过去时与一般现在时的区别，并练习造句。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、时态大考验 (写出下列动词的过去式) 1. am____________ 2.is_______________ 3. are_______________ 4. do ____________ 5.go ___________ 6. see ______________ 7. feed ___________ 8. ride ____________ 9. say_______________ 10. talk __________ 11.take_____________ 12. have______________ II、精挑细选 ( ) 1. --__________. -- It was pretty good. A. How did you do it? B. How was your trip? C. What did you do? ( ) 2. ________ you ________ to Lucy’s birthday party yesterday? A. Do, go B. Does, go C. Did, go ( ) 3. Cathy and Ruth ________ the classroom every day. A. clean B .cleans C. cleaned ( ) 4. --________ you at home last night? -- Yes. But my brother _________ not at home. A. Were, was B. Were, is C. Are, was 【快乐链接】 Let’s Chant Together! Am is was，I was free．He was busy． Are were，are were．You were happy．They were bored． Have has had．I had a headache before eight． Say said，say said，I said "yes"．He said "no"． Do does did，I did my homework yesterday morning． Go went，go went．I went to bed late last night． 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 11 How was your school trip? Section A 2a — 2d (P62) * 教师寄语：A thousand mile trip begins with one step. 千里之行，始于足下。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 继续学习谈论过去事件。 --How was your school trip? -- It was excellent/great/…. --What did sb. do/see/say/…? -- Lucky you. 【体验学习】： I、 预习交流 1. 根据图片和对话等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、 翻译官 1. 种苹果_____________________ 2.摘草莓 ____________________ 3. show around _________________ 4.农场(主)___________________ 5. 钓鱼 ______________________ 6. 看星星___________________ 7. 在乡下_____________________ 8. Lucky you._________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review and Lead-in Quick action: The phrases in 1a or the past forms of the verbs. Step2 Presentation Show some pictures, ask and learn. eg: --What did he/ she do? -- He/She picked some strawberries./… Step3 Listening 1. Go through the sentences in 2a & 2b. 2. Listen to 2a and check the questions you hear. 3. Listen and circle T or F in 2b. Then check the answers. Step4 Pair work 3. Ask and answer questions with your partner. Finish 2c. 4. Role-play the conversations in 2d. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何谈论过去事件，并模仿 2d 编写对话。 Notes:__________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、最佳选择 (用适当形式填空) go shopping, practice English, play chess, watch a movie, do some reading 1. I ___________ in the library last weekend. 2.Let’s go to ___________! There are many new movies these days. 3.Jim ___________ last night, because he had an English speech contest this morning. 4.Grandpa often ___________ with his friends in the afternoon. 5. Yesterday I ____________ with my mother at the mall. II、你来我往 A: 1. _______________, Peter! B: Good morning, Alice! A: Alice, 2._________________ B: Oh. It was great. A: 3. ____________________ B: I went to the zoo with my friends. A: 4. ___________________ B: We saw monkeys, pandas, tigers and so on. Then we went to the park and played games. A: 5.___________________ B: Yes, we had a good time. A: Luck you. 【快乐链接】 Riddle (谜语) --- 谜底为 Section A 出现的单词 1. I am animal kept by farmers to produce milk. 2. What always goes to bed with his shoes on? 3. It’s very small in the sky, but it’s actually very big. What is it? 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 11 How was your school trip? Section A Grammar Focus— 3c (P63) * 教师寄语：A thousand mile trip begins with one step. 千里之行，始于足下。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、总结归纳 Section A 部分语法重点； 2、并将所学知识学以致用。 【体验学习】： 预习交流 1. 根据 Grammar Focus, 归纳 Section A 部分语法重点； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Grammar Focus 1. Give a summary about it. 2. Try to recite it. Step2 Presentation 1. Go through the letters in 3a. 2. Complete the two letters, then check the answers. 3. Read the letters together. Step4 Group work Make up a story. Each student adds a sentence. eg: Student 1: Last week I visited my aunt’s house. Student 2: The weather was beautiful. Student 3: We went fishing. Student 4: …. II、合作交流 1. Group work: 总结归纳 Section A 部分语法重点 Notes:_________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________ 2. Group work: 动词过去式归类 规则动词：____________________________________________________ (并列出规则) __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ 不规则动词：__________________________________________________ 【自主检测】：完形填空 Mr. and Mrs. Taylor were teachers. They lived in a big _ __1_ _ .Last year they went to the countryside for their summer vacation. They___ 2_ _ it very much because it was a quite clean place. One day they went for a ___ 3_ in the morning and saw an old man. He sat in the ___ 4 _ sun in front of his house. Mr. Taylor went to him and asked, “Do you like ___5 in this quiet place?” The old man answered, “Yes, I __ _6 __ .” Mr. Taylor asked, “What are the _ __7_ _ things about it?” The old man answered “Well, ___ 8___ here knows each other(互相) well. They often come to see me, and I often go to visit _ __9 __, too. Also, there are lots of children here.” Mr. Taylor said, “That’s interesting. Well,___10__ are the bad things?” The old man thought for a short time and said, “Well, the same things.” ( ) 1. A. city B. house C. country ( ) 2. A. learned B. enjoyed C. played ( ) 3. A. talk B. walk C. look ( ) 4. A. cold B. cloudy C. warm ( ) 5. A. reading B. living C. sitting ( ) 6. A. can B. am C. do ( ) 7. A. good B. cheap C. delicious ( ) 8. A. nothing B. everyone C. no one ( ) 9. A. him B. you C. them ( ) 10. A. what B. how C. who 【快乐链接】 一般过去时顺口溜 动词一般过去时，表示过去发生的事； be 用 was 或用 were，have，has 变 had； 谓语动词过去式，过去时间作标志； 一般动词加-ed，若是特殊得硬记。 否定句很简单，主语之后 didn’t 添； 疑问句也不难，did 放在主语前； 如果谓语之前有 did，谓语动词需还原；动词若是 was，were，否定就把 not 添。 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 11 How was your school trip? Section B 1a — 1d (P64) * 教师寄语：Travel is the road to knowledge. 旅行是知识之路。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 继续进一步学习和谈论过去事件。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和对话等，预测新课内容； 2 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 去动物园___________________ 2. 爬山___________________ 3. 参观博物馆 ________________ 4. fire station ______________ 5. painting ____________________ 6. 画画 __________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in Grammar Focus Step2 Presentation 1. Learn and finish 1a. Then try to remember the phrase. 2. Game: Quick action about the phrases. eg: A: 钓鱼.  B: go fishing 3. Make sentences by using the phrases in 1a as following. -- I went to the zoo last weekend. -- He climbed a mountain with friends yesterday. Step3 Listening 1. Go through the questions in 1a and the chart in 1c quickly. 2. Listen and answer the questions in 1b. 3. Listen again. What did Jane and Tony do on their last school trip? Check Tony or Jane. Then check the answers. Step4 Pair work Ask and answer questions according to the order form. II、合作交流 Group work: 总结归纳 How…?句型, 如何回答? 请举例说明。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、时态大考验 ((写出下列动词的过去式)) 1. visit____________ 2.climb_______________ 3. pick_______________ 4. grow ___________ 5.draw ____________ 6. ask _______________ 7. study ___________ 8.learn ______________ 9. can_______________ 10. buy ___________ 11.teach______________ 12. eat_______________ II、快乐阅读 In England, people don’t talk to each other when they travel. If you get on a bus, or in a train, you will sometimes see people sitting and looking out of the window. Other people will be reading books or newspapers. When you meet English people, they often begin a conversation by talking about the weather. So when you meet somebody in England, you can say, “Nice weather for the time of the year!” “But it was a little cold yesterday,” somebody may answer. “But it will get a little warmer later,” you can say. Talk like this, and the English will think, “How friendly you are!” ( ) 1. English people often ___________ on the bus. A. talk a lot B. talk to each other C. read newspapers ( ) 2. When you meet an English people, you can begin the conversation by talking about the __________. A. weather B. time C. food ( ) 3.According to the passage, if you talk to English people about the weather, they will think you are ___________. A. English. B. right C. friendly ( ) 4. Which sentence is true? A. English people like traveling by bus. B. English people are unfriendly. C. English people don’t talk much when they’re by train. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 11 How was your school trip? Section B 2a —2c (P65) * 教师寄语：Travel is the road to knowledge. 旅行是知识之路。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 根据文章找寻关键信息，提高阅读能力。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 X k B 1 . c o m 1. 根据图片和文章标题等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. exciting___________________ 2. 可爱的 _____________________ 3. 慢的快的______________ 4. 昂贵的便宜的_____________ 5. 下棋 ____________________ 6. 坐火车 _____________________ 7. model robot _______________ 8. 对…感兴趣 _________________ 9.总的说来__________________ 10. not…at all ___________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in 1. Brainstorming: T: We often use adjectives to describe things. Some describe good things and some describe bad things. Can you think of some adjectives? 2. Finish2a. Put a √ for good and an × for bad. Step2 Presentation 1. Read the diary entries about the school trip and answer the two questions. 2. Read again and complete the chart in 2b. 3. Group work: read the ad again, try to find the key points. Then say them out one by one. eg: <1> by train = take the train <2> after that <3> …. Step3 Consolidation Read the key points and the article together. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结阅读技巧，并尝试根据 2c 中的表格复述文章。 Notes:_____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 【自主检测】：完形填空 June, 15th Today we had _ __1 _ exciting trip. My father, my mother and I _ __2 _ to summer camp. We went to the mountains. First, we ___ 3_ to the foot(脚) of the mountain___ 4__ bus. In the middle of the mountain, there was a river. The water was clean. I washed my face with the ___ 5 _. I t was warm. There __ _6 __ some fishes in the river. And there were a lot of __ _7 __ flowers in the mountain. At 12 o’clock, many people got together, and they were very _ __8_ _ . We made our lunch in the mountain. The food was very ___ 9___ , and we liked it very much. After lunch, we went on our trip. At last, we got to the top(顶部) of the mountain. We were very ___10 ___. All in all, we enjoyed the trip very much. ( ) 1. A. a B. an C. the ( ) 2. A. go B. goes C. went ( ) 3. A. get B. got C. gets ( ) 4. A. by B. take C. in ( ) 5. A. water B. food C. trip ( ) 6. A. is B. were C. was ( ) 7. A. ugly B. difficult C. beautiful ( ) 8. A. friendly B. boring C. expensive ( ) 9. A. terrible B. delicious C. exciting ( ) 10. A. happy B. unhappy C. lovely 【快乐链接】： Diary 人们常说：要真正学好英语，就要培养用英语思想的能力。但是，要做到这一点是不容 易的。有一个简单易行的办法可以帮助我们练习用英语思想，那就是用英语写日记。日记是 十分自由的文体，不像作文，必须有正式的主题，讲究文体。日记是思想，是感情，是内心 的一切。实际上，用英语写日记是最有效的练习英语写作的形式。它能够让你从各种生活细 节及感受中学到最生活化、最地道的英语词语。可以这么说：如果你能流利地写出好的英语 日记，你的英语就已经成功了一大半。 从某种意义上说，写英语日记又是最难的写作，因为它包罗万象，涉及到生活的各个方 面，对词汇的要求特别高。因此，在日常学习中，必须做一个“有心人”，准备一本笔记本， 对一些英语的习惯表达法及时记录下来，以便在以后记日记的时候可以使用。 英语日记的写作格式 :日记的第一行，要写年、月、日与星期，然后要写明当天的气候 状况，如果是游记，还要写明地点。日记正文可以是叙事、描述、说明、议论等各种形式。 其实，由于日记是非常随便的，因此常与上述文体结合在一起使用。日记内容取自生活，可 长可短，有时无事可记，一两句也可以。切忌今天记，明天不记，三天打鱼，两天晒网，破 坏了记日记的情趣。另外，日记也应该尽可能讲究一些文采，切忌写成流水账。 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 11 How was your school trip? Section B 3a — Self Check (P66) * 教师寄语：Travel is the road to knowledge. 旅行是知识之路。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 学习写自己的学校旅行日记。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和文章等，预测新课内容； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. diary entry________________ 2. Really?___________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in 1. Read 2b on P65 together. 2. Write more verbs and their past forms in each group. Finish Self Check: Ex.1. Then give a summary about it. 3. Finish Self Check: Ex.2: Complete the conversations with the correct forms of the verbs in the box. Step2 Presentation 1. Look at the pictures in 3a. What are they doing in each picture? 2. Complete Bob’s diary entry. Finish 3a. Check the answers. 3. Complete Bob’s classmate Linda’s diary entry. Finish 3b. Check the answers. 4. Read the two diary entries together. Step3 Writing Now write a diary entry for your own school trip. Explain if you liked it and why. II、合作交流 Group work: 分析总结如何写出自己的学校旅行日记。 Notes:________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ Ⅲ、深入探究 Group work: 动词一般过去时的变化规则 (课本 P114)。 Notes:________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ 【快乐阅读】： Mike’s summer vacation On July 18th,2012, Mike and his parents went to Qingdao, a city in Shandong for summer vacation. Qingdao is a beautiful city with sea. It was about 12:00 when they arrived there on the first day. They found a hotel and had a short rest. It was really hot and they decided to go to the beach. At about 3:30 pm, they got to the beach. There were many people there. Some were lying on the beach and many children were playing in the water. Mike was playing with them and he was very happy. His parents also felt relaxed. About two hours later, they went back to the hotel. On the second day, it rained all day. Mike visited the history museum with his father and his mother went shopping. On July 20th, they went to Laoshan Mountain in the morning and took a bus home in the afternoon. They were tired but happy. ( ) 1. Where did Mike’s family go on vacation? A. To Shanghai. B. To Tianjin. C. To Qingdao. ( ) 2. What did Mike’s father do on July 19th? A. He swam in the sea. B. He visited the history museum. C. He went shopping with Mike’s mother. ( ) 3.How long was their vacation? A. One day. B. Two days. C. Three days. ( ) 4. How did they go back home? A. By train. B. By bus. C. By plane. ( ) 5. Which of the following is true? A. It rained on July 19th. B. They went shopping on July 20th. C. Mike didn’t play in the water on the first day. 【快乐链接】： 日记格式 Date(日期): June 23rd Body(正文)：Place: Where did you go? Activities: What did you do/see? Feelings: How was the place? How was the weather? How was the food? How were the people? ... 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 12 What did you do last weekend? Section A 1a — 1c (P67) * 教师寄语：If you want to understand today, you have to search yesterday. 想要懂得今天，就必须研究昨天。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 进一步学习过去时态的用法；学会谈论过去事件。 -- What did you do last weekend? -- Well, on Saturday morning, I played badminton. 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1.根据单元标题和图片等，预测新课内容； 2.根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3.自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 做作业__________________ 2. 去海滩______________________ 4. go boating________________ 5. 打羽毛球____________________ 3. 去电影院 ________________ 6. camp by the lake_______________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in Ask several students one by one: What did you do last weekend? Step2 Presentation 1. Learn the phrases in 1a. 2. Finish 1a, then check the answers. 3. Look at the conversation, and learn the drills: -- What did you do last weekend? -- Well, on Saturday morning, I played badminton. Step3 Listening Listen and finish 1b. Check the answers. Step4 Pair work Practice the conversation in 1c . Then make your own conversations. II、合作交流 Group work: 尝试用一般过去时造句 + 表过去的时间状语。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、时态大考验 ((写出下列动词的过去式)) 1. camp____________ 2.work_______________ 3. feed_______________ 4. play ____________ 5.stay _____________ 6. study ______________ 7. tell _____________ 8. lose _______________ 9. hear_______________ 10. run ____________ 11.shout______________ 12. answer_____________ 【快乐链接】: 动词过去式不规则变化之一： “AA 制” 动词的一般过去式，有规则变化和不规则变化。而在这些不规则变化中，实际上又隐藏 着规则。这里的 AA 表示动词原形与动词过去式一致。这些动词有： putput, cutcut, letlet, costcost, hurthurt, readread, beatbeat （注意：read 写法相同，读音不同。其它写法和读音都相同。） 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 12 What did you do last weekend? Section A 2a — 2d (P68) * 教师寄语：If you want to understand today, you have to search yesterday. 想要懂得今天，就必须研究昨天。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 继续学习谈论过去事件; 学会用疑问词 who, what, when。 【体验学习】： I、 预习交流 1.根据图片和对话等，预测新课内容； 2.根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3.自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、 翻译官 1. visit my grandma_______________ 2.备考 _____________________ 3. work as a guide _________________ 4. over______________________ 5. How interesting! ________________ 6. living habit_________________ 7. kind of _______________________ 8. 熬夜 _____________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review and Lead-in Quick action: The phrases in 1a or the past forms of the verbs. Step2 Presentation Show some pictures, ask and learn. eg: --What did you/he/ she/they do? --Where did you/he/she/they go?--Who…? Step3 Listening 1. Go through the sentences in 2a. 2. Listen to 2a and underline the words you hear. 3. Listen again. Write C for Carol, J for Jack or B for Becky next to the statements in 2b. Then check the answers. Step4 Pair work 1. Student A asks questions with who, what or where and Student B answers. Finish 2c. 2. Role-play the conversations in 2d. II、合作交流 Group work:模仿 2d 编写对话,谈论过去事件。 Notes:__________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、精挑细选 ( ) 1. -- Did you have a ___________ at school last week? -- Yes, we did. I got an A. A. test B. look C. walk ( ) 2. -- How long did Helen __________ in Changsha? -- For a week. A. sit B. stay C. feel ( ) 3. Lucy __________ go to the movies. She watched TV at home. A. isn’t B. didn’t C. wasn’t II、你来我往 A: Hi, Mike! 1. _______________ B: It was pretty good. A: 2._________________ B: I went to the Summer Palace last weekend. A: 3. ____________________ B: I went with my parents. A: 4. ___________________ B: It was cloudy and cool. A: 5.___________________ B: The people there were very friendly. We had so much fun. 【快乐链接】动词过去式不规则变化之二： X k B 1 . c o m ia: sing  sang ～ew: fly flew ring  rang drawdrew swim  swam growgrew drink  drank knowknew begin  began throw threw 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 12 What did you do last weekend? Section A Grammar Focus— 3c (P69) * 教师寄语：If you want to understand today, you have to search yesterday. 想要懂得今天，就必须研究昨天。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 1、总结归纳 Section A 部分语法重点； 2、并将所学知识学以致用。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1.根据 Grammar Focus, 归纳 Section A 部分语法重点； 2.自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 跑开______________________ 2.shout at_____________________ 3. mouse(复数)_________________ 4. 语言______________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Grammar Focus 1. Give a summary about it. 2. Try to recite it. Step2 Presentation 1. Go through 3a&3b quickly. 2. Finish 3a. Fill in the blanks with who, what, when, where or how. 3. Complete the blanks in 3b with the correct forms of the words in the box. 4. Check the answers and then read together. Step4 Group work Think of two things you did last weekend. Draw pictures of them. Your classmates guess what you did. II、合作交流 Group work: 归纳疑问词 who, what, when, where, how 的区别,并造句。 Who__________________________________________________________ What__________________________________________________________ When_________________________________________________________ Where_________________________________________________________ How__________________________________________________________ 【自主检测】： I、 完美呈现 1. The streets _________ (be) crowded last weekend. 2. Jim _________ (visit) his uncle the day before yesterday. 3. Larry’s MP4 was _____________(lose) yesterday. 4. Maria __________ (find) a girl crying when she went home. 5. Jenny ____________ (stay) at home and __________(study) f or the test last Saturday. II、最佳选择 (用所给词适当形式填空) write, sleep, welcome, walk, rain 1. Hello, Susan! ____________ to our school! 2. Be quiet! Your father __________________ now. 3. Tom’s house is near his school. He always __________ to school. 4. Last weekend, Tony ___________ a letter to h is pen friend in England. 5. Can you tell me what you usually do on ___________ days? 【快乐链接】 动词过去式不规则变化之三： dt: build  built ～ught: buy  bought send  sent bring  brought spend  spent think  thought eep ept: keep  kept fight  fought sleep slept teach  taught sweep swept catch  caught 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 12 What did you do last weekend? Section B 1a — 1e (P70) * 教师寄语：Don’t let yesterday use up too much of today. 别让昨天耽误今天。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 继续进一步学习和谈论过去事件。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1.根据图片和对话等，预测新课内容； 2.根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3.自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 弹吉它____________________ 2. 去图书馆_____________________ 3. 放风筝 ___________________ 4. 和朋友共进晚餐 ______________ 5. swimming pool ______________ 6. Not really. _____________________ 【课堂导学】： I、新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in Grammar Focus Step2 Presentation 1. Learn and finish 1a. Then try to remember the phrase. 2. Game: Quick action about the phrases. 3. Do you think the activities in 1a are fun? Draw a happy face or an unhappy face under each line. Step3 Listening 1. Listen. What did Sally and Jim do last weekend? Complete the chart in 1b. 2. Listen again and check the answers. Step4 Pair work Make a conversation with a partner. Talk about what Sally and Jim did last weekend. Then ask what your partner did last weekend.eg: --Who went to the library? – Sally did. --Did you do anything interesting last weekend? – Not really, but I…. II、合作交流 Group work: 回顾听力考试题型，总结归纳提高听力的方法。 Notes:_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【快乐阅读】： New York City “If you love somebody, send him to New York for it’s Heaven; if you hate somebody, also send him to New York for it’s Hell.” This is a famous line from the TV play Beijingers in New York in 1990s. Many people learned a lot about New York City from the TV play. As the biggest city in America, New York is the biggest centre of the finance, trade and culture of the country. It’s an important centre for international affairs because the headquarters of the UN are also here. When you think of New York, what comes to your mind first? Broadway, Times Square, Central Park, Wall Street or the Statue of Liberty? Different people will give different answers. However, few people will think of its nickname —“the big Apple”. Why do people call New York “the big Apple”? There are different stories about that. Which one is true? No New Yorkers seem to care about it. They are happy to be able to have a real taste of the exciting “Apple”. 判断正误, 正确写 “T”, 错误写 “F” ( ) 1. Many Chinese people didn’t know New York City in 1990s. ( ) 2. New York is the biggest city in the USA. ( ) 3. The headquarters of the UN are in New York. ( ) 4. The Statue of Liberty is not in New York. ( ) 5. There is only one story about the New York’s nickname—“the big apple”. 【快乐翻译】： “如果你爱一个人，送他去纽约，因为那里是天堂；如果你恨一个人，送他去纽约，因 为那里是地狱。”这是 20 世纪 90 年代的热播电视剧《北京人在纽约》中的经典台词，很多 中国人就是通过这部电视剧开始对纽约有进一步的了解。 作为美国最大的城市，纽约是美国最大的金融，贸易和文化中心。它也是一个重要的国 际事务中心，因为联合国总部也在这里。 当你想到纽约的时候，你最先想起的是什么？百老汇，时代广场，中央公园，华尔街还 是自由女神像？不同的人会给出不同的答案，不过很少人会想到它的昵称---“大苹果”。 为什么人们会把纽约叫做大苹果呢？对此有各种各样的说法，究竟哪一个才是真的呢？ 纽约人似乎对此并不在意，他们很开心自己可以真正品尝这个精彩的“苹果”。 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: Unit 12 What did you do last weekend? Section B 2a —2c (P71) * 教师寄语：Don’t let yesterday use up too much of today. 别让昨天耽误今天。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 根据文章找寻关键信息，提高阅读能力。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和文章标题等，预测新课内容； 2. 根据音标拼读单词并牢记； 3. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 高中___________________ 2. 搭帐篷 _____________________ 3. 生火___________________ 4. each other ____________________ 5. so…that…_______________ 6. look out of ___________________ 7. 上上下下 _______________ 8. 把…弄醒 ___________________ 9. 对…喊__________________ 10. learn from ___________________ 11. 吃惊 __________________ 12. useful lesson _________________ 【课堂导学】： II、 新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in What kinds of animals are people sometimes afraid of? Why? Make a list. Step2 Presentation 1. Read about Lisa’s weekend and answer the questions in 2b. 2. Group work: read the ad again, try to find the key points. Then say them out one by one. eg: <1> middle school/high school/… <2> ago… <3> …. Step3 Consolidation 1. Read the key points and the article together. 2. Read again and complete 2c. Put the phrases in order. 3. Group work: Retell the story according to 2c. II、合作交流 Group work: 回顾阅读考试题型，总结归纳提高阅读的方法。 Notes:_____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 【快乐阅读】： Tony’s Sunday Tony got up at eight o’clock and then had his breakfast. His mother cooked his favorite food---chicken noodles for him. After breakfast, Tony began to do his homework. He didn’t have too much homework, because teachers wanted them to have a good rest during weekends. At thirty past nine, Tony read his favorite book Harry Potter. It was really a great book. After that, he listened to Jay’s songs. At eleven, he went to his friend Mike’s party at KFC. They were very happy because they ate their favorite food- hamburgers. Lunch was over at about one thirty in the afternoon. Then they all went to see a new movie. This was Tony’s Sunday. He really had a good time. ( ) 1. What food did Tony like best? A. Milk and eggs. B. Egg noodles. C. Chicken noodles ( ) 2. When did Tony read his favorite book? A. At 9:30 am. B. At 9:00 am. C. At 8:30 am. ( ) 3. Tony and all his friends all liked _______ best. A. vegetables B. fruit C. hamburgers ( ) 4. What did Tony and his best friend do after lunch? A. They went to KFC. B. They listened to Jay’s songs. C. They watched a movie. ( ) 5. Which of the following is true? A. Tony had too much homework. B. Tony’s favorite book is Harry Potter. C. Tony went to Mike’s party at 9:00. 【快乐链接】： 记忆口决 记忆的根本在于背诵， 记忆的基础在于理解； 记忆的窍门在于重复， 记忆的措施在于整理； 记忆的助手在于联想， 记忆的动力在于应用。 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: ___ Unit 12 What did you do last weekend? Section B 3a — Self Check (P72) * 教师寄语：Don’t let yesterday use up too much of today. 别让昨天耽误今天。 【学习目标】【学习重点】： 学习用一般过去时写作，提高写作能力。 【体验学习】： I、预习交流 1. 根据图片和文章等，预测新课内容； 2. 自学课文，勾画出重点和疑惑。 II、翻译官 1. 呆在家________________ 2. cook dinner___________________ 3. 脱口秀 _______________ 4. firefighter ___________________ 【课堂导学】： II、 新课呈现 Step1 Review & Lead-in 1. Read 2b on P71 together. 2. Complete the conversation. Finish Self Check: Ex.2. 3. Read the conversation together. 4. Finish Self Check: Ex.1: Complete the phrases. Then use some of them in the past forms to write a story. Step2 Presentation 1. Look at the pictures in 3a. Ask Ss as following: X k B 1 . c o m --What did he do in Picture 1? -- He cleaned his room. --What did he do in Picture…? -- He …. 2. Complete the passage. Finish 3a. Then check the answers. 3. Read 3a together. Step3 Writing Write about what you did last weekend. II、合作交流 Group work: 回顾本学期所写作文，总结归纳提高写作的方法。 Notes:________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ 【快乐阅读】： Love, sometimes we can’t see it! This is an old story. One day, a man was not happy when his 7-year-old daughter made a box with some paper. The family didn’t have much money. So the father thought his daughter wasted(浪费)the paper. The next day, the little girl gave the box to her father and said,“Dad, today is your birthday. This box is for you.” The man was happy. But he was not happy again when he found there was nothing in the box. “Why didn’t you put anything for me in the box?” He asked his daughter. The little girl looked at him and cried, “Dad, I put my love in the box. It’s all for you!” The man felt sad and said sorry to his daughter. Sometimes, we can’t see love with our eyes. ( ) 1. How old was the daughter? X|k |B| 1 . c|O |m A. Six years old. B. Seven years old. C. Eight years old. ( ) 2. What did the daughter do the next day? A. She gave the box to her father. B. She put some money in the box. C. She gave some paper to her father. ( ) 3. Why was the father was not happy again when he opened the box? A. Because he didn’t like the box. B. Because there was nothing in the box. C. Because he thought his daughter wasted paper. ( ) 4. How did the father feel at last? A. Happy. B. Sorry. C. Bored. ( ) 5. Which of the following is true? A. The family had lots of money. B. The daughter loved her father. C. The father didn’t like his daughter. 【学习体会】 成功&收获: 失败&不足: 七年级英语下册全册教案 Unit 1 Can you play the guitar? Section A (1a-2d) 1.板书课题： Unit 1 Can you play the guitar? Section A (1a-2d) 教学过程 1、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 1) 能掌握以下单词：（能做到四会） guitar, sing, swim, dance, chess, play chess, draw, speak, speak English, join, club… （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词， 教师指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在 黑板上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 2）、Ss look at the picture in 1a. Then read the words and phrases. Let Ss match the activities with the people. Then Check the answers with the class together. 3）、. Presentation 出示一些反映各种活动的图片、幻灯片或播放课件，引导学生谈论活动： He／She can dance／swim／sing／"··But I can’t dance／swim／sing／...等，学 习表达活动的动词短语。 4）、Game (What can I do?) T: Tell your partners what you can do. For example: I can play the guitar. I can sing and dance. Ss work in groups. The let some Ss talk to their classmates in front of the class. 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教 ！）能了解以下语法：情态动词 can 的用法和 want to do sth.的用法。 2）、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、 良、差） 3）、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 4）、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决， 并板书于黑板。 Listening 1. T: Now let’s listen to the tape, find out the right conversation, and number them 1-3. （播放 lb 部分的录音让学生听，引导学生根据所听到的内容，选出对话的 顺序，完成 1b 部分的教学任务。） 2. Check the answers: (3, 2, 1 ) . Pair work 1. Ask the Ss to practice the conversations in 1b with a partner. Then make their own conversations. (引导学生展开 Pairwork 活动，完成 lc 部分口语交际的教学任务，学会运用 can 询问和表达能力。) . Listening 1. Work on 2a; T: Now, look at the pictures on P2, listen to the four conversations. Just listen. (Play the recording for the first time, students only listen carefully.) Then, listen to the recording again, and circle the clubs you hear. Check the answers with the class. 2. Work on 2b; 引导学生根据对话内容用正确的单词填空，补全对话，再播放听力材料一遍。 让学生进行校对，练习听力和写作能力，完成 2b 部分的教学任务。 Check the answers with the Ss. （4）当堂训练。 1. Look at 2b and talk about what the people can do and the clubs they want to join. 老师可以和一名优秀的学生做一个对话的例子，让学生们明白如何去问答， 例如： T: What club does Lisa want to join? S1: She wants to join the chess club. T: Can she play chess？ S1: No, she can't. 2. Ss work in pairs to practice asking and answer about Lisa, Bob and Mary. 3. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations. 3、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）、用最快的速度朗读课文，理解课文大意，勾出不理解的短语，或语言点及语 法结构。 能掌握以下句型： 2)、① —Can you play the guitar? —Yes, I can./ No, I can't. ② —What can you do? —I can dance. ③ —What club do you want to join? —I want to join the chess club. 3）用最快的速度朗读课文，理解课文大意，勾出不理解的短语，或语言点及语 法结构。 4）回答课文相关问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1）、学习询问和谈论彼此的能力和特长； 2) 掌握一些弹奏乐器的表达方式。。 3、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 4、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 5、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 . Role-play 1. Ask Ss to look at the picture in 2d. Then Ss read the dialogue by themselves and try to find out the answers to these questions. ① What club does Bob join? ② What club does Jane join? Ss read the conversation by themselves and find the answers to the questions. Then check the answers: ① Bob joins the soccer club. ② Jane joins the English and art club. 2. Explain something that Ss can't understand. 3. Let Ss read after the teacher or play the recording and let Ss read after the recording. 4. Ss work in pairs to act out the conversation. 5. Ask some pairs come to the front of the classroom. They try to act out the conversation. See which group is the best. 板书设计： Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 1.板书课题： (Grammar Focus-3c) 一、第一次先学后教.（ Grammar Focus.） 1、出示学习指导。 1) 继续练习运用情态动词 can。学会询问和谈论彼此的能力和特长。 2）能够学会使用情态动词 can 的疑问句以及它的肯定句和否定句 。 2、先学。 （1） 让学生自己先读语法焦点，并找出语法结构。 老师将情态动词的 can 的用法，以学案的方式呈现在大屏幕上，让学生自主学习， 并发现其用法。 （2）可以看出，在 Can…？句型中，情态动词 can 没有________和_______ 的 变化。 （3）用情态动词 can 来询问他人的能力可以归纳为以下句型： Can + _______ + _________ + 其他? 肯定回答：_________________ 否定回答： _________________ What + can + _______ + ________ ? 学生们合作学习讨论上面学案的答案，总结情态动词 can 的用法。 老师找部分学生对上述问题作答，并一起讨论总结情态动词 can 的用法。 3、后教。 （1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （2） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区 分语法结构上的变化。 Section A (1a-2d) Drills： 1. —Can you sing? —Yes, I can./No, I can't. 2. 2b: 1. chess, chess 2. English; English 3. sing, dance, music 4. ① What club does Bob join? ② What club does Jane join? 5. want to do sth They want to have some rice and vegetables. （3） 教师讲解 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练 （1）. Ask some Ss about their abilities. T: Hi, S1! What can you do? S1: I can sing and dance? T: Can you play the guitar? S1: Sorry, I can't. But I can play chess. T: What club do you want to join? S1: I want to join the chess club. （2.） Role-play. Let some pairs role play the conversation in 2c. 1. 阅读指导： 2. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。 ① 你会游泳吗？ ______ you ______? ② 是的，我会。/ 不，我不会。 Yes, ____ _______. / No, I _______. … (其余试题见课件部分) 3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行 强化 二、第二次先学后教.（补充句子） 1、出示学习指导。 能掌握以下句型： ① —Can you play the guitar? —Yes, I can./ No, I can't. ② —What can you do? —I can dance. ③ —What club do you want to join? —I want to join the chess club. 2、先学。 1、让学生独立完成 Write questions and answer with the words and phrase.提醒学 生 but 的用法。 2、根据单词提示选单词，补充完整句子。 3、后教。 1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （4） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区 分语法结构上的变化。 （5） 教师讲解 but 的用法和 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 1. Look at 3a. 告诉学生们用所给的词汇来造句子。首先，用情态动词 can 及所给 的第一个动词词组来造一个一般疑问句，并作出一个否定的回答。然后，用转折 连词 but 及第二个词组造一个肯定句。 Teacher makes the first one as a model: Can Wu Jun speak English? No, he can't, but he can speak Chinese. Ss try to make sentences using the phrases in 2~5. They can discuss with their partners. Then let some Ss tell their answers to the class. Check the answers with the class. 2. Look at 3b. Tell Ss that your school is going to have a School Show next week. What can you do? You can show your talent in it. In order to let all the students know about it. We have to write a poster. Now, read the poster below and try to complete the poster with the words in the box. 方法指导：应通读全文，掌握短文大意；然后，仔细阅读每个句子，根据空格 前后的词语进行推敲。比如，第三空格后有 guitar 一词，可知些空格应填 play 一词。其他类似。 学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并逐句推敲每空应填什么词，在实际的 运用提高自己的阅读能力、分析能力及综合运用能力。 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。 4、当堂训练。 . Group work 1. What can your group do in the school show? Make a list, then report to your classmates. 2. First, work in group ask and answer about what you can do? e.g. S1: What can you do, S2? S2: I can do kong fu. S1: Great! What about you S3? S3: I can sing very well. … 3. Then make a list together. 4. Everyone in your group must write a report. Then select one student to report what your group can do. e.g. In my group, Li Ming can do kong fu. Zhang Li can sing very well. Ma Shuang can dance well… (最后，可以经学生们评议来推举最有能力的小组） . Exercises 1. If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen. Homework 1. Read the sentences in Grammar Focus. 2. Write a report about what your family members can do. 板书设计 课后反思： Section B 1a-2c 1.板书课题：Section B 1a-2c 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）出示学习指导 能掌握以下单词：（能做到四会） drum, play the drum, piano, play the piano, violin, play the violin, also, people, help (sb) with sth, center, home, today, be good with, make, make friends, weekend, on weekends/on the weekend, teach, musician （2）、先学。 1）、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2）、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词， 教师指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在 黑板上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 Section A Grammar Focus-3c 1. Can you do sth.? Yes, I can. No, I can't. 2. Can she/he do sth.? Yes, he/she can. No, she/he can't. 3. What can you/he/she do? I/He/She can do… 3a: 2. Can Mike play basketball? No, he can't. But he can play tennis. 3. Can Jane and Jill dance? No, they can't. But they can sing. 4. Can Grace play soccer? No, she can't. But she can play volleyball. 5. Can Bill write stories? No, he can't. But he can tell stories. 3b: sing, dance; play; tell （一）、第一次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 2）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 2、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 3、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点 拔解决。 Presentation 1. T: Show some really instruments like violin, drums. Then play some of them. Tell Ss I can play the drums, I can play the violin, I can play the violin… Ss: Do after the teacher, Act as he/she are playing an instrument. The say: I can play the piano, I can play the piano, I can play the drums… . Game (Talent show) 1. Act and show your classmates your talent. T: Please stand in front of your classmate. Act and say what you can. e.g. S1: (sing and dance) I can sing and dance. S2: (play the drum) I can play the drum. S3: … 2. Ask as many students as possible to say their abilities. . Listening 1. Tell the Ss that they will listen to some sounds of the instruments. Listen and number the words [1-4] in the order of the sounds you hear in 1a. 2. Play the recording again and check the answers. 3. T: Now let's work on 1c. First, let one student read the words and phrases aloud. Then listen to the tape and circle the words and phrase you hear. 4. Ss listen to the tape and circle the words and phrases they hear. 5. Check the answers: 6. T: Now please look at the chart in 1e. What can Bill, Cindy and Frank do? What can't they do? You'll listen to the tape again. Then try to fill in the blanks. 听力指导：要抓他们会做的事情，以及不会做的事情这两个重点内容。因此在 听的时候，应重点将人物及动作这两个方面的听清，其他作为非重点内容。 7. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks. 8. Check the answers with the class. （4）当堂训练。 . Group work 1. Work in groups. Take turn to talk about what Bill, Cindy and Frank can and can't do. S1: Bill can play the guitar, but he can't sing. S2: Cindy can sing and play the drum, but he can't play the piano. S3: Frank can play the piano, but he can't sing or dance. S4: … 2. Teacher can walk around the classroom, and give some help to the Ss. . Reading 1. T: Let's meet three new friends, Peter, Aland and Ma Huan. What can they do？ Now read the descriptions and underline what they can do. 2. Let some Ss read aloud what Peter can do. Then let another Ss read aloud what Cindy and Frank can do. 3. Let Ss work in pairs to ask and answer about what they can do. S1: What can Peter do? S2: He can speak English and play soccer. S2: What can Alan do? S1: He can play ping-pong. 2、第二次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 2) 能掌握以下句型： ① —Can you play the piano? No, I can't. / Yes, I can. ② be good with … ③ help…with… （2）、先学。 1）画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象 2）理解课文大概意思。 2）回答课文相关问题。 （3）、后教。 1、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 … . Reading . T: Now We'll read three ads. What's the main idea of the each ad? What's each ad's title? Now let's read the three ads and select a title for each ad. 2. 方法指导：首先，应读懂三个题目的意思；然后，认真阅读三个广告的内容， 通过读广告来总结出它们的主要内容，并确定一个最为贴切的题目。 综合广 告内容与三个题目，看每个题目与广告的内容是否最为贴切。 3. Ss read carefully and try to select a title for each ad. 4. Check the answers with the class. Reading 1. T: Suppose Peter, Alan and Ma Huan want to help to do something after school. Which ad is right him/her? Now read the descriptions in 2a and the ads in 2b again. Select a right ad for each person. 2. 方法指导：首先，再次明确每个能做的事情，以及他/她喜欢做的事情；然后， 看每则广告中要求应聘者去做什么事情；最后，综合考虑三个人的情况，做 出一个最佳选择。 3. Ss read the descriptions in 2a and the ads in 2b again. Try to select a right ad for each person. They can talk about the answers in their groups. 4. Check the answers with the class. Homework 1. Remember the new words and phrase after class. 2. Try to retell what Peter, Alan and Ma Huan can do after class. 板书设计： Section B 1a-2c 1. play the violin, play the drums, play the piano (提示：在音器前必须加定冠词 the; 而在棋类、球类前则不须加 the；play chess; play basketball, play volleyball) 2. 2b: A; C; B 3. 2c: Peter---2; Alan---1; Ma Huan---3 4. Explanation: help sb. with sth. = help sb. do sth. be good with ... also 与 too also 用于句子中间；而 too 常用于句子末尾 课后反思： Section B 3a-Self Check 1、出示课题：Section B 3a-Self Check 2、第一次“先学后教”。（补充句子） （一）出示学习指导 1、根据单词提示完成填空题。 （二）先学。 （1）根据单词提示学生独立完成填空题。 （2）比较难的题学生之间或者小组之间进行讨论完成任务。 （三）后教。 （！）教师公布答案，学生之间相互改作业。并且大家总结哪些题做得好而那些 题做得好。 （2） 师加强对做错题型的讲解及训练。 （四）当堂训练。 Practice 1. T: Next week we'll have a music festival. So we need some musicians to help with the music festival. I wrote an ad for help, but some of the words are missed. Please read the ad again and try to fill in the blanks with the words in the box. 2. 阅读指导：首先，应通读全文，理解全文的大意；认真读每一句话，在理解 句子意思的基础上，分析空格所缺词汇的意思；然后分析空格上下文的意思或 上下文的单词来确定空格中的词汇的词性；最后，在综合理解的基础上确定每 个空格处的词汇。 3. Ss read the passage then fill in the blanks with the words in the box. 4. Check the answers. Writing 1. Do you want to make poster in English by yourself? Now work with your group members, think of an even at our school. Then try to make a poster by yourselves. The events may be the music club, the Sports Day; the art festival and so on 2. Ss work in groups. First think of an event at the school. Then try to make the poster. 3. 写作指导： 首先，应确定与该做事项所须的相关能力；可以用借鉴 2b 或 3a 中的广告的样 子来写。其次，为了使语气显得较为委婉，可以用一些一般疑问句来询问应聘 者的能力，比如：Can you swim? Can you…? 最后，一定记住将本次活动的联 系方式写清楚。 4. Teacher walks around the classroom. Give any help Ss may need. Ask one the students in each group to read aloud their ads to their class. Let other students in other groups give some advice on the ads. 5. Decide which ad is the best. 2、第二次“先学后教”（补充句子，写短文） （一）出示学习指导。 1、根据例题完成填空题 2、完成 3a 部分，组织语言把它写成作文。 （二）先学。 （1）先让学生独立完成 Self Check。 （三）后教。 （2）教师公布答案,看谁做的最好，并且让做得好的学生总结一下自己是怎么做 的这些题，或者说说自己的学习方法，帮助后进生，做到相互学习的好习惯 Self Check 1 1. 让学生们在小组内讨论这些分类的能力活动；每个小组成员积极发言，由小 组长负责整理记录。 2. 让某个小组的小组长说出他们小组整理的答案，再由其他小组成员进行补充； 最后，将一份完整的能力活动分类总结表写在黑板上让同学们进行借鉴与补 充。 3. Give Ss a few minutes to remember the abilities. Self Check 2 1. Tell Ss what they should do. You can add as many words as you can to make phrases. Give Ss an example: play the drum, play the piano, play the violin, play the guitar; play chess, play volleyball… 2. Ss work in groups. Try to make as many phrases as they can. They should write down their phrases on their notebook. 3. Let some Ss read their phrases. Let other students add more phrases. （四）当堂训练。 Self check 3 1. Now you can write something you like. e.g. What can you do? What can't you do? What about your family members, your friends, your classmates. You can write at least five sentences. First I'll give a model: I can speak English. I can play chess. I can play basketball. But I can't play the piano. I can't play the violin. My sister can play the violin. She can play the guitar, too. 2. Ss write about something by themselves. 3. Let some Ss read their sentences to the class. Homework 1. Review Section B. 2. Write a short passage about your uncle or your aunt. What he/she can do? What she/he can't do. 板书设计： 课后反思： Unit2 what time do you go to school ? Section A (1a-2d) 1.板书课题： Unit2 what time do you go to school ? Section A (1a-2d) 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） Section B 3a-Self Check 3a: music, dance, play, guitar, can, call 3b: Events: school music club; school soccer club; school English club, Art Festival; Sports Day Self Check 1: play the guitar; play the piano; play the violin; speak Chinese, speak French, speak Japanese; run, play soccer, play basketball, play volleyball, play tennis…; write stories, help mum cook, wash the clothes… （1）、出示学习指导 能掌握以下单词：（能做到四会） up,dressed,brush,tooth,shower,usually,forty, （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 做游戏，猜一猜。 Ｔ:仔细听我说的谜语，猜猜它是什么？ It’s no feet ,but can it walk wit 2. Ss look at the picture in 1a. Then read the words and phrases. Let Ss match the activities with the people. H it hands It’s has no mouth, but it can speak to you . It say “Tick,Tick and Tick” every day .What is it ? S1:It’s a clock. 3 教师拿着一个钟表，交手时间的表达方法。 T:Look at the clock .Tell me the time like this.Five o’clock. （教师把钟表的时针和分针拔到相应的位置） S2：Six o’clock . 多做几次这样的练习。 T: Look at the picture 1a(出示 1a 教学内容) Do you know how to say “7:05”,7:15…”in English ? We can say seven five ,seven ten ,seven fifteen … Let’s say it to gether. . Presentat ion 出示一些反映各种活动的图片、幻灯片或播放课件，引导学生谈论时间： 学习表达时间 Game T: Tell your partners what time do you usually get up ? I usually get up at six thirty,seven o’ clock. Ss work in groups. Then let some Ss talk to their classmates in front of the class. 3、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （1）、出示自学指导。 1）.能掌握以下句型： ----- what time do you usually get up ,Rick？ -----I usually get up at six thirty. 2）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 3）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 （4）当堂训练。 . Listening 1. T: Now let’s listen to the tape, find out the right conversation, and number them 1-3. （播放 lb 部分的录音让学生听，引导学生根据所听到的内容，选出对话的 顺序，完成 1b 部分的教学任务。） 2. Check the answers: (3, 2, 1 ) . Pair work 1. Ask the Ss to practice the conversations in 1b with a partner. Then make their own conversations. (引导学生展开 Pairwork 活动，完成 lc 部分口语交际的教学任务，学会运用 can 询问和表达能力。) Listening 1. Work on 2a; T: Now, look at the pictures on P2, listen to the four conversations. Just listen. (Play the recording for the first time, students only listen carefully.) Then, listen to the recording again, and circle the clubs you hear. Check the answers with the class. 2. Work on 2b; 引导学生根据对话内容用正确的单词填空，补全对话，再播放听力材料一遍。 让学生进行校对，练习听力和写作能力，完成 2b 部分的教学任务。 Check the answers with the Ss. . Pair work 1. Look at 2b and talk about what the people can do and the clubs they want to join. 老师可以和一名优秀的学生做一个对话的例子，让学生们明白如何去问答， 例如： T: What time do you usually get up ? S1: I usually get up at seven o’ clock . T: H ow about you friend? S1: She usually gets up at seven ten. 2. Ss work in pairs to practice asking and answer 3. Ask some pairs to act out their conversations. 4、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。 (1)、 出示学习指导 2）、用最快的速度朗读课文，理解课文大意，勾出不理解的短语，或语言点及语 法结构。 3）、回答课文相关问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1）、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2）、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3）、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 4）.学习频度副词 usaually 的用法。 5）、时间的表达法。 （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 . Role-play 1. Ask Ss to look at the picture in 2d. Then Ss read the dialogue by themselves and try to find out the answers to these questions. Ss read the conversation by themselves and find the answers to the questions. Then check the answers: 2. Explain something that Ss can't understand. 3. Let Ss read after the teacher or play the recording and let Ss read after the recording. 4. Ss work in pairs to act out the conversation. 5. Ask some pairs come to the front of the classroom. They try to act out the conversation. See which group is the best. Homework: 1. Remember the new words and expressions after class. 2. Recite the conversation after class. 板书设计： Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 1、出示课题 Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) （一）、先学后教.（ Grammar Focus.） 1、出示学习指导。 1）能够读 Grammar Focus 的所有内容。 2）能够学会使用情态动词 can 的疑问句以及它的肯定句和否定句 。 3）学习用 When 和 What time 引导的特殊疑问句询问时间，学下表达频率的 副词 usually always never 能用英语正确表达时间。 2、先学。 （1）让学生自己先读语法焦点，并找出语法结构。 老师将情态动词的 can 的用法，以学案的方式呈现在大屏幕上，让学生自主学习， 并发现其用法。 （2）完成补充句子。 3、后教。 （1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （1） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区 分语法结构上的变化。 （2） When 和 What time 引导的特殊疑问句询问的时间，学下表达频率的 副词 usually always never 能用英语正确表达时间。 4、当堂训练 1. Ask some Ss about time T: Hi, S1! What time do you usually get up ? S1: I can usually get up at seven o’clock. T: then what are you doing ? Section A (1a-2d) What time do you usually get up ? I usually get up at seven o’clock. I usually get up at seven ten I usually get up at six thirty. I usually get up at six fority. S1: then I wash my face /have breakfast/reading . T: What about she? S1: She always goes to work at nine o ‘clock.… 2. Role-play. Let some pairs role play the conversation in 2c. ete the poster with the words in the box. 板书设计 Section B 1a-2c 1、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 1) 能掌握以下单词：能做到四会。 drive, live, stop, think of, cross, river, many, village, villager, between, between…and…, bridge, boat, ropeway, year, afraid, like, dream, come true half,pastmquarter,homework,walk,clean,run. （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训 （二）、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 2）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 2、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 Section A Grammar Focus-3c 1. Can you do sth.? Yes, I can. No, I can't. 2. Can she/he do sth.? Yes, he/she can. No, she/he can't. 3. What can you/he/she do? I/He/She can do… 3a: 2. Can Mike play basketball? No, he can't. But he can play tennis. 3. Can Jane and Jill dance? No, they can't. But they can sing. 4. Can Grace play soccer? No, she can't. But she can play volleyball. 5. Can Bill write stories? No, he can't. But he can tell stories. 3b: sing, dance; play; tell 3、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点 拔解决。 Ⅲ. Game (Talent show) 1. Act and show your classmates your talent. T: Please stand in front of your classmate. Act and say what you can. e.g. S1: (sing and dance) I can sing and dance. S2: (play the drum) I can play the drum. S3: … 2、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 When do students usually eat dinner? They usually eat dinner at a quarter in the evening. When does Tom and usually get up ? He usually gets up at half past five. （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 （二）、第四次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 2）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 2、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 3、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点 拔解决。 Listening 1. Tell the Ss that they will listen to some sounds of the instruments. Listen and number the words [1-4] in the order of the sounds you hear in 1a. 2. Play the recording again and check the answers. 3. T: Now let's work on 1c. First, let one student read the words and phrases aloud. Then listen to the tape and circle the words and phrase you hear. 4. Ss listen to the tape and circle the words and phrases they hear. 5. Check the answers: 6. T: Now please look at the chart in 1e What are they doing? You'll listen to the tape again. Then try to fill in the blanks. 听力指导：要抓他们会做的事情，以及不会做的事情这两个重点内容。因此在 听的时候，应重点将人物及动作这两个方面的听清，其他作为非重点内容。 7. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks. 8. Check the answers with the class. 教学 1a,1b 1 利用投影仪将说中表示时间的图展现出来，根据所展示的时间，做对话 T:What time is it ? S1:It is …(教师帮助学生回答?) T:What do you usually do at this time ? S2:I usually… (教师讲解 past/to 的用法) 根据 1a 中所示的 时间和活动安排，两人一组完成对话，要注意人称的替换。 3.教学 1，1,1 1.教师播放录音机，第一遍要求学生跟读并全处所听到的活动， 2. 教师比播放音机，第二遍要求学生在圈出的单词和词组后写出你所听到的时 间。 3、两人一组相互提问： 练习 2a 引导的特殊疑问句及其回答。 教学 2b,2c 讨论并完成 2c 板书设计： 课后反思： Section B 3a-Self Check 1、出示课题 Section B 3a-Self Check 2、第一次“先学后教”。（补充句子） （一）出示学习指导 1、根据单词提示完成填空题。 （二）先学。 （1）根据单词提示学生独立完成填空题。 （2）比较难的题学生之间或者小组之间进行讨论完成任务。 （三）后教。 （！）教师公布答案，学生之间相互改作业。并且大家总结哪些题做得好而那些 题做得好。 （2）师加强对做错题型的讲解及训练。 （四）当堂训练 1、情境导入 谈论你一天的活动。如： Section B 1a-2c What do you usually do at this time？ I usually do my homework at thia time. When do students usually eat dinner? They usually eat dinner at a quarter in the evening. When does Tom and usually get up ? He usually gets up at half past five. What time do you usually get up ? Iusually get up at … When do you always go to school? I usually go to school at … 2、教学 3a,3b 教师出示 3a,上的内容，小组合作按顺寻排列成一个短文。 （2）让学生写一篇关于自己的日常活动的短文。（教师指导） 3、第二次“先学后教”（补充句子，写短文） （一）出示学习指导。 1、根据例题完成填空题 2、完成 3a 部分，组织语言把它写成作文。 （二）先学。 （1）先让学生独立完成 Self Check。 （三）后教。 （2）教师公布答案,看谁做的最好，并且让做得好的学生总结一下自己是怎么做 的这些题，或者说说自己的学习方法，帮助后进生，做到相互学习的好习惯 （4）、当堂训练 3.完成 Self Check 1.给学生一定的时间在小组内或者个人独立完成。 2、展示答案。 4.homework. 板书设计： Unit 3 How do you get to school? Section A (1a-2d) 1.板书课题：Unit 3 How do you get to school? Section A (1a-2d) 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导：（能做到“四会”） train, bus, subway, ride, bike, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, hundred, far, minute, kilometer, new, every, every day （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 Section B 3a-Self Check 3a: music, dance, play, guitar, can, call 3b: Events: school music club; school soccer club; school English club, Art Festival; Sports Day Self Check 1: play the guitar; play the piano; play the violin; speak Chinese, speak French, speak Japanese; run, play soccer, play basketball, play volleyball, play tennis…; write stories, help mum cook, wash the clothes… 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 . Presentation 1. T: If you are here, but your school is in Shanghai. How do you get to school? Ss: I take the bus /plane/ boat / ship / car / taxi I ride a bike / motorbike T: Do you know any other way? 2. Teacher shows pictures on the big screen .归纳出行方式和常用短语. Ask some questions about how you get to…? (让学生积极主动的思考想象总结，多媒体增加趣味性，加强直观性，) 3. Show a picture about Part 1, on the screen. Point at girls or boys in the picture. Ask students to answer and write in the blanks. S1 : How does he / she go to school? S2 : He / She … … 1a T: Look at the picture on your book. Match the words with the picture. (学生们完成 1a 的学习任务，然后校对答案) 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1). 复习基数词及时间的表示方法。 2) how 引导的特殊疑问句，表示乘坐何种交通工具的方式。how far, how long 引导的特殊疑问句。 3）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 4）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 Listening 1. Make sure the Ss know what to do. Give them an example orally if possible. 2. Read the names in the box. 3. Play the tape and check the answers. . Pair work Ask two students to read the dialogue in the speech bubbles to the class. Then ask students to work in pairs. Ask and answer how students get to school in the picture. Finally ask some pairs of students to present their conversations to the class. Listening 1. Revise the numbers, first, zero~nine, next, ten~nineteen, then, twenty, thirty, forty…finally, twenty-one, twenty-two… Teach the new word "hundred". 2. Play the tape for the students to finish 2a. Then play again and check the answers . Presentation Show a picture on the TV and explain these are your home and school. Teach: home----school How long 10 minutes How far two kilometers Then make up a dialogue to practice. A: How do you get to school? B: I usually take the bus. A: How far is it from your home to school? B: It's about two kilometers. A: How long does it take? B: It takes 30 minutes by bus Listening 1. Tell Ss the following recording is about how Tom and Jane go to school. 2. First, listen to the recording fill in the first column. 3. Then, play the recording for the Ss again. Ss listen and complete the rest of the chart. 4. Check the answers. 3、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）、用最快的速度朗读课文，理解课文大意，勾出不理解的短语，或语言点及语 法结构。 2） 能掌握以下句型： ① —How do you gto school? —I ride my bike. ② —How does Mary get to school? —She takes the subway. Talk about how to get to places (谈论出行方式) take the bus /subway /train /taxi , ride a bike /walk . 3）、回答课文相关问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 . Role-play 1. Read the dialogue and find the answer to these questions: ① How does Jane get to school? ② How far is it from home to school? ③ How long does it take to get to school from her home? 2. Ss read the conversations and then find the answers to the questions. 3. Check the answers with the class. 4. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and repeat. 5. Ss read the conversation then role-play the conversation. 6. Let some pairs act out the conversation. Homework 1. Remember the new words and expressions in this period. 2. Role-play the conversation after class. 板书设计： Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 1、出示课题：Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) （一）、第一次先学后教.（ Grammar Focus.） 1、出示学习指导。 1)继续练习谈论出行方式 take the bus /subway /train /taxi, ride a bike /walk . Section A (1a-2d) 1. —How do you get to school? —I ride my bike? —How does Mary get to school? —She takes the subway. 2. 表达“几十” 个位数字+ty twenty, thirty, 表达“几十几” 一定要用连字符 twenty-five, sixty-nine hundred one hundred, two hundred 3. ① How does Jane get to school? ② How far is it from home to school? ③ How long does it take to get to school from her home? 2 用不同方式练习 how 引导的特殊疑问句，表示乘坐何种交通工具的方式。how far, how long 引导的特殊疑问句。 3）复习基数词及时间的表示方法。 2、先学。 1）自学 Grammar Focus 2）how 引导的特殊疑问句，表示乘坐何种交通工具的方式。how far, how long 引 导的特殊疑问句，以及回答。 3、后教。 （1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （2）、教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区 分结构 （3）how far, how long 引导的特殊疑问句用法以及用法。 4、当堂训练 . Grammar Focus. 1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。 ① 你如何到达学校？ _______________________ 我骑自行车。____________________ ② 她如何到达学校？ ___________________ 她乘公共汽车。____________________ ③ 到达学校要花多长时间？____________________ 大约花费 15 分钟。___________________ ④ 从你有到学校有多远？____________________ 仅约两公里。 ____________________ ⑤ 简步行去上学吗？_______________________ 不，她骑自行车。 ____________________ ⑥ 他们乘公共汽车去上学吗？_________________ 不，他们步行。 ____________________ 2. Ss check the answer with their partners. 3. Give Ss six more minutes to try to remember the sentences. Practice 1. Look at 3a. Tell Ss to match the sentences with the answers. 2. 方法指导： 首先，应重点读左面的五个疑问句，分清它们是特殊疑问句还是 一般疑问句；其次，要明确特殊疑问词的用法：how 是对出行方式提问；how long 是对行程所用的时间提问；how far 是对距离提问。然后，再读答语。依 次给每个问句找到正确的答语。 3. 学生们按教师说的方法，认真阅读找答语，提高阅读理解的能力。 4. Check the answers with the class. （二）、第二次先学后教.（补充句子） 1、出示学习指导。 能够独立完成填空题 3a-3b。 2、先学。 1、让学生独立完成 Write questiongs and answer with the words and phrase.提醒学 生 but 的用法。 2、根据单词提示选单词，补充完整句子。 3、后教。 1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （3） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区 分语法结构上的变化。 （4） 教师讲解 but 的用法和 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练。 . Practice 1. Look at 3b. Tell Ss to use these words below to make questions. Then answer them. 2. 方法指导： 首先，应分清它们是特殊疑问句还是一般疑问句，看所给的词汇， 如果含有特殊疑问词应是特殊疑问句，如果没有则应是一般疑问句；其次， 要明确特殊疑问词的句式结构：特殊疑问词+ 一般疑问句。然后，再根据自 己的实际情况，回答这些问题。最后，再通读一遍自己造的问句与答语，确 保没有语法上的错误。 3. 学生们按教师说的方法，分析每句话中所给的提示词，并造成一个正确的问句， 然后给出一个合理的答语。 4. Check the answers with the partners. How do you get to school? I take a bus to school. 5. 提示：对部分能力的较差的学生，可以给他们下列问题提示： ① How far is it from your home to school? ② How do you get to school? ③ How long does it take you to get to school? 6. 看谁能最先完成调查，并找到与表格中数据相一致的同学。 . Exercises 1. If time is enough, do more exercises on the screen. Homework 1. Read the sentences in Grammar Focus. 2. Make a survey. How does your father get to work? 板书设计 Section A Grammar Focus-3c 一、1. How (出行方式) 2. How long (行程时间) 3. How far (距离) 二、3a: 1. c 2. e 3. d 4. a 5. b 三、 1. How do you get to school? 课后反思： Section B 1a-2c 1、出示课题 Section B 1a-2c 2、第一次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1) 能掌握以下单词：（能做到“四会”） drive, live, stop, think of, cross, river, many, village, villager, between, between…and…, bridge, boat, ropeway, year, afraid, like, dream, come true 2）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 3）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 2、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 3、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点 拔解决。 （4）当堂训练。 . Presentation 1. 我们来认识几个新单词。I'll show you some pictures on the screen. Let's learn some new words. （在屏幕上展示 p16 页的图片） 2. Ss read and try to remember the new words and expressions. . Match T: 1. Let's open our books at page 16, point out the blank line in front of each numbered phrase. Ask Ss to match each phrase with a picture by writing the letter of the picture in the bank in front of the correct word. One has done for students. 3、第二次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 2）了解课文内容，回答老师提出的课文相关联的问题。 （3）、后教。 1) 、表达采用怎样的交通方式去某地： Well, I ride my bike to the subway station. Then I take the subway. 2）、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 3）、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 4）、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 . Talking 1. Let students tell how Bob gets to his grandparents' home. Ask students to use the pictures in 1d. And write these sentences on the blackboard. First he … Next he… Then he… Finally… 2. Ss work with their partners. Try to say how Bob get to his grandparent's home. 3. Check the answers: Reading 1. Fast reading Read the passage and find the answer to this question: What's the students' and the villagers' dream in this village? Ss read the passage quickly and find the answer to this question: Their dream is to build a bridge. 2. Careful reading Read the passage again and find the answers to the questions below: 1. How do the students in the village go to school? 2. Why do they go to school like this? 3. Does the boy like his school? Why? 4. What is the villager's dream? Do you think their dream can come true? 阅读指导： 首先，读这四个问题，记住这四个问题。其次，带着问题去仔细读 短文，并在短文中寻找相关问题的回答依据。然后，根据相关依据，写出问题的 答案。 Ss read the passage again and try to find the answers to the questions. Check the answers with the class. Reading 1. Let's work on 2c. Let's read the passage again and complete the sentences with the words from the passage. 2. 阅读指导： 1) 首先，阅读这个五个句子，掌握句子的意思，大体确定空格处所缺单词的词 性，是形容词、名词还是动词等。 2）其次，带着这五个句子，在短文去寻找与这五个句子相关的依据。在相关的 句子中寻找空格处所缺的单词。比如：第一句应是在短文中的第五句中“But for the students in a village in Yunnan, it is difficult.”，可知本空格处应为 difficult 一词。其他几个也按这样的方法来做。 3） 最后，再读一遍这些句子，看有不有不恰当的地方。 3. Check the answers: difficult, big, quickly, afraid, true Homework 1. Remember the new words and expressions in this period. 2. Ask Ss try to retell the passage after class. 板书设计： Section B 1a-2c 1. bus stop (站点), bus station（综合车站） 2. What's the students' and the villagers' dream? 3. 2b: They go on a ropeway to school. Because there's not a bridge on the river. Yes, he does. Because He loves his teacher and his classmates. It's to have a bridge on the river. Yes, I think so. Let more people know about it. And let more people help them build the 课后反思： Section B 3a-Self Check 一、出示课题：Section B 3a-Self Check 二、第一次“先学后教”。（补充句子） （一）出示学习指导 1) 复习及综合运用如何表达出行方式。 2) 能正确运用 take + 出行方式；ride…及 by… 来表达自己的出行方式。 3）能用所学的方式来描述自己或他的出行方式。 （二）先学。 （1）根据单词提示学生独立完成填空题。 （2）比较难的题学生之间或者小组之间进行讨论完成任务。 （三）后教。 （！）教师公布答案，学生之间相互改作业。并且大家总结哪些题做得好而那些 题做得好。 （5） 师加强对做错题型的讲解及训练。 （四）当堂训练 Presentation 1. Using some pictures to show some ways of transportation: walk, take the bus/train/subway/plane/boat; ride the bike/horse; go/get to sp by bus/train/subway… 让学生们理解这几个词组的用法。 2. Make some sentences using these phrases. 3. Give some examples of the sentences. Reading 1. Read the e-mail from your pen pal Tom in the US. Fill in the blanks with the words in the box. 阅读指导：首先，明白方框里单词的意思； 其次，阅读这封 e-mail 了解大意； 然后，认真读每一个句子，根据上下文及空格前后的关键词来确定空 格处的意思。并确定应哪一个单词填空。 最后，再通读一遍短文，看短文是否通顺恰当。 2. 学生们按老师所指导的方法，认真阅读短文，并用正确的单词填空。 3. Check the answers. Ⅳ. Writing In this task, it's our turn to write an e-mail to Tom and tell him how you get to school. 1. First, let's look at these questions below: (Let one student read the questions aloud. Make sure all the students know the meaning of the questions.) 2. Work in pairs ask and answer the questions. And write them down on your workbook. 3. Try to write a short e-mail with the help of the sentences you wrote. 4. Check the e-mails with your partners. 5. Let some Ss read their e-mail to the class as a model. Ⅴ. Self Check 1 1. We've learned many ways of transportations. Now let's have a short review. Look at the words in the boxes below to form as many expressions as possible. 2. Ss work in groups and try to write as many expressions as possible: take a bus, by bus, take a train, by train, take a subway, by subway, ride a bike, by bike…. 3. Let some Ss read their answers. Let other students add more phrases. Note: by + 出行方式（不加 the）; take(ride) + a （the）出行方式 三、第二次“先学后教”（补充句子，写短文） （一）出示学习指导。 1、根据例题完成填空题 2、完成 3a 部分，组织语言把它写成短文。 （二）先学。 （1）先让学生独立完成 Self Check。 （三）后教。 （2）教师公布答案,看谁做的最好，并且让做得好的学生总结一下自己是怎么做 的这些题，或者说说自己的学习方法，帮助后进生，做到相互学习的好习惯 （4）、当堂训练 Ⅵ. Self Check 2 1. Look at the chart below. Write at least five questions. Then answer the questions with the information in the chart. 2. 写作提示：根据表格提示，应有三种类型的问题：出行方式（How）; 距离（How far）; 所用的时间 （How long）; 对每个人都问这三个问题一次。然后根据表 格中的提示来回答。 例如：—How does Tony get to school from home? —He gets to school by bike. 3. 同学们根据老师的指导进行问答。将问题与答案写在练习本。然后在小内交 换检查。 Homework 1. Review all the dialogues and passages in Section B. 2. Write a short e-mail to your pen friend to tell your ways to get to school. 板书设计： 1. How does Tony get to school from home? He gets to school by bike. 2. How far is it from her home to school? It's about 7 kilometers. 课后反思： Unit 4 Don't eat in class. Section A (1a-2d) 1、出示课题：Unit 4 Don't eat in class. Section A (1a-2d) 1、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 1) 能掌握以下单词：（能做到四会） rules, arrive, late, hall, dinning hall, listen, listen to, fight, sorry Section B 3a-Self Check 3a: go, leave, walk, boring 3b: 1. When do you leave home? 2. How do you get to school? 3. How far is it from your home to school? 4. How long does it take you to get to school? 5. Do you like your trip to school? Self Check 1: take a bus, by bus, take train, by train, take a subway, by subway, take plane, by plane; ride a bike, by bike, walk, on food Self Check 2: 1. How does Tony get to school from home? He gets to school by bike. 2. How far is it from her home to school? It's about 7 kilometers. （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 . Presentation 教师出示书上 1a 的图片，向学生提问。 指着图上奔跑的男孩提问 T：What’s the boy doing? S: He’s running. T: Where is he running? S: He’s running in the hallways.(板书，教读) T：Can you run in the hallways? S: No, I can’t. T: So please don’t run in the hallways.(板书，教读) （= You can’t run in the hallways.） 学生跟读数遍，明白祈使句和“can”的表达含意。 T：Why is he running in the hallways? S: He’s late. T: Oh, he’s late for class.(板书，教读) You can’t arrive late for class.(板书，教书) = Don’t arrive late for class. … . 1a T: Now, Look at the picture on your textbook. Each of the students is breaking one of these rules. Please finish 1a. . Listening 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2) 能掌握以下句型： ① Don't eat in class. ② You must be on time. ③ Eat in the dining hall. 3）. 学会用英语表达一些标志的含义。 4） 熟练使用目标语言谈论对某些规章制度（校规、家规等）的看法 5）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 1. T: Now let’s listen! What rules are these students breaking? Write the numbers after names? 2. 学生们听录音，完成 1b，选出四位学生都违反了哪条校规；听之前，学生要 读会英文名。 3. Check the answers: Ⅴ. Pair work 请两位学生朗读 1c 部分的句型；要求学生两人一组对话表演，SA 扮演外校转来 新生，SB 告知本校校规。（学生可经过讨论，多说出他们想到的校规，不必只限 于书上；教师应给予帮助） Ⅵ. Listening 1. Work on 2a: First, let's read the sentences in 2a together. T: Now, let's listen to the recording. Check the activities Alan and Cindy talk about. Ss listen to the recording and check the activities they hear. Play the recording again for the Ss to check the answers. 2. Work on 2b: Make Sure Ss know what they should do. Listen to the recording again. Can Alan and Cindy do these activities? Circle can or can't above. 3. Check the answers: Ⅶ. Pair work 1. Suppose you are Alan and your partner is Cindy. Talk about the rules in 2a. 2. Let some students come to the front and act out the conversations. 3、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）、用最快的速度朗读课文，理解课文大意，勾出不理解的短语，或语言点及语 法结构。 2）、能轻声跟读语音机注意句中的语气。 3）、回答课文相关问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 4) 肯定祈使句是省略掉主语的原形动词开头； 5) 否定祈使句则是在肯定祈使句前加上“don’t”。 6) 情态动词 must 及 have to 在用法上的区别。 （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 . Role-play 1. Read the conversation and find some rules in this school? 2. Ss read the conversations and find the answers to this question. 3. Check the answers: ( Don't be late for school. Don't bring music players to school. You always have to wear the school uniform. You have to be quiet in the library. ) Homework: 1. Remember the new words and expressions. 2. 完成下列句型转换试题 1）I can play computer games on weekends.（一般疑问句） _________________________________? Yes, ____________. 2） He has to wear uniform.（变否定句） He _____ _____ _____ wear uniform. 3） I have to wear sneakers for gym class.（一般疑问句） _____ you ____ ____ wear sneakers for gym class? Yes, I ____. 4） They have to wash clothes.（提问） ____ do they have ____ ____? 5） You can’t go out on school nights.（换一种表达） _______ go out on school nights. 6） Don’t talk in class.（同上） No _________. 板书设 Section A (1a-2d) Main sentences: 1. Don't arrive late for school. You must be on time. 2. —What are the rules? —Well, we can't arrive late for class. We must be on time. 3. Listen to music in the music room. 4. We always have to wear the school rules. 课后反思： Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 一、出示课题 Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 二、第一次先学后教.（ Grammar Focus.） 1、出示学习指导。 继续练习运用如何做自我介绍及问候他人。学会从对话中获取对方的基本信 息（询问他人姓名）。 能掌握以下句型： ① Don't eat in class. ② You must be on time. ③ Eat in the dining hall. 2、先学。 让学生自己先读语法焦点，并找出语法结构。 ① Don't eat in class. ② You must be on time. ③ Eat in the dining ha 以学案的方式呈现在大屏幕上，让学生自主学习，并 发现其用法。 3、后教。 （1）教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （2）教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区分 语法结构上的变化。 （3）教师讲解 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练 . Grammar Focus. 1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。 ① 不要在楼道里跑。_______________________ ② 不要打架。 ____________________ ③ 有什么规则？ ___________________ ④ 我们必须按时上课。 ____________________ ⑤ 我们可以在教室里吃东西吗？____________________ ⑥ 不能。但我们可以在餐厅里吃东西。___________________ ⑦ 我们可以在教室里带帽子吗？____________________ … 2. Ss finish off the sentences and check the answers by themselves. 3. Give eight more minutes for the Ss to remember the sentences. Ⅲ. Writing 1. Look at 3a. Do you know the meaning of these pictures? Yeah, you see them in the school library. Can you write the rules for the school library? 2. Ss discuss the pictures and make some rules. 3. Let some Ss read their rules aloud. 4. Check the answers with the class. (Don't listen to music in the library. Don't eat or drink in the library. Don't take photos in the library. ) 二）、第二次先学后教.（补充句子） 1、出示学习指导。 能够独立完成填空题 3a-3b。 2、先学。 1、让学生独立完成 Write questiongs and answer with the words and phrase.提醒学 生 but 的用法。 2、根据单词提示选单词，补充完整句子。 3、后教。 1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （3） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区分 语法结构上的变化。 （4） 教师讲解 but 的用法和 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练。 . Practice Work on 3b: 1. T: Use the words to make questions about the rules. Then write answers according to your school. For example: Be quiet? (she/have to/ in the library) Does she have to be quiet in the library? Yes, she does. 2. 注意： have to 虽是情态动词，但其在句子中与谓语动词共同构成句子时，其 一般疑问句应用助动词 do 或 does 来帮助构成；而情态动词 can 则直接提前构成 一般疑问句式。 3. Ss work by themselves and try to write the sentences on the workbook. 4. Ss work in pairs. Ask and answer the sentences. olest? Ⅵ. Exercises 1. If time is enough, do some more exercises on the screen. Homework 1. Read the sentences in Grammar Focus. 2. Make some rules at home. 板书设计 课后反思： Section B 1a-2c 1.板书课题： 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 Section A Grammar Focus-3c 一、 Sentences: 1. —Can we wear a hat in the classroom? —Yes, we can. / No, we can't. 2. —Does she have to wear a uniform at school? —Yes, he does. No, he doesn't. 二、3b:2. Does he have to eat in the dinning hall? Yes, he does. 3. Can we listen to music in the hallways? Yes, we can. 4. Can we wear a hat in the classroom? No, we can't. 1) 能掌握以下单词：（能做到“四会”） out, go out, dish, do the dishes, night, before, dirty, kitchen, more, noisy, relax, read, terrible, feel, strict, be strict with, remember, follow, follow the rules, luck （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 3、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 2）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 2、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 3、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点 拔解决。 4、讲解下列句型： ① Don't leave the dirty dishes in the kitchen. ② I can't relax either. ③ I must read a book before I can watch TV. ④ I have to help mom make breakfas （4）当堂训练。 . Presentation 1. Show some pictures on the big screen and let Ss learn the new words and expressions. 2. 学生看着 1a 部分的图片 T: What day is it today? Ss: It’s Tuesday. T: The boy is going out on school nights. （板书，教读） 学生理解“school nights”的含义。 Can you go out on school nights? Ss: No, we can’t. T: Yes, in China, the students can’t go out on school nights. So please don’t go out on school nights. 3. 请学生朗读 1 部分的“rules”，并将图片 a~h 的序号填写在 1b 这些规则前的方 框中。 4. Check the answers with the class. Ⅲ. Listening 1. Tell Ss they'll listen to the recording about Dave's house rules. Listen and put an× for things Dave can't do and a √for things he has to do. 2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and check. 3. Play the recording again for the Ss to check the answers. Ⅳ. Listening 1. Now let's work on 1c. Now first, let's read the phrases aloud together. 2. Explain the meaning of the phrases if necessary. 3. Play the recording three times for the Ss to listen and write the phrases in the chart in 1b. (指导：听一遍时应仅听，不写，并听准确与每个活动相关的时间。然后，在 听第二遍时，边听边做记录，可以用速记符号来词；也可用单词开头的字母来作 记录。最后，整理自己的记录，写成正确的词组。最后一遍，听并检查所记录的 词组是否正确。) 4. Check the answers: Ⅴ. Group work 1. Divide the Ss into groups. Each group has eight students. 2. T: Now let's talk about Dave's home rules. 3. Ss work in groups. Every student can say one rule. Then you can write down what the rules are when other group members say. 4. Make a list of Dave's house rules. Ⅵ. Thinking 1. T: Everybody may have something unhappy. When you are unhappy who do you like to talk to? S1: I like to talk to my aunt. S2: I like to talk to my best friend. S3: I like to talk to … T: OK. Do you know, when I'm unhappy I like to talk to Dr. Know. She's great and he knows everything. She can give you the best advice. Now, let's work on 2a and let's meet Dr. Know. Ⅶ. Presentation 1. Show some pictures on the big screen. Teach Ss the new words and expressions. dirty, dishes, kitchen, noisy, relax, terrible, read, feel, strict, be strict with 2. Ss learn the new words and expressions and try to remember them. 2、第二次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2）画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 3）了解课文内容，回答老师提出的课文相关联的问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 4、讲解 must, have to/ can/can't 的用法 （4）、当堂训练 1）、口述课文内容。 2）、分角色朗读课文。 3）、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 . Reading 1. Fast reading T: There are many rules in Molly's home and school. She feels unhappy. Read the letter and find the answer to this question: What does Molly feel about the rules? Ss read the letter and find the answer to this question. (she feels terrible.) 2. Careful reading 1) Read the letter again and underline the rules for Molly. 2) Ss read the letter and try to find the rules for Molly and underline them. 3) Check the answers with the class. (Let some Ss read their answers aloud. Let other Ss add some rules. ) 3. Careful reading 1) Read Dr. Know's letter and answer this question: What does she think of the school and home rules? 2) Ss read Dr Know's letter and find the answer to this question. 3) Let one student read out his/her answer. (She thinks parents and schools are sometimes strict, but they make rules to help us. We have to follow them. ) Reading 1. Read the letter again and complete the sentences with have to/ must, can or can't. 2. 提示： have to 与 must 的用法： 1）must 表示一种主观的需要，而 have to 表示一种客观的需要，意思是“不得不”。 如： I have to attend an important meeting this afternoon. 今天下午我不得不参加一个重要的会议。 Mother is out, so I have to look after the shop. 妈妈不在家，因此我不得不照看商店。 2）have to 的否定形式是 don’t have to, 相当于 needn’t。如： They don’t have to buy a computer at present. 他们目前没有必要买电脑。 3. 阅读指导： 1) 首先，认真阅读 2c 中的这些句子，明白它们所谈论的相关规则。 2）带着相关规则再去读 2a 中的信，在与之相关的内容处认真分析，理解规则的 真正含义，并填上正确的词汇。 3）再次阅读这些句子一遍，看是否通顺。 4. Check the answers. Homework 1. Remember the new words and expressions in this period. 2. Ask Ss write down Molly's rules at home and at school. 板书设计： Section B 1a-2c 1. Phrases: go out, do the dishes, clean his room 2. 2b: What does Molly feel about the rules? She feels terrible What does Dr Know think of the rules at home and at school? 课后反思： Section B 3a-Self Check 1：出示课题:Section B 3a-Self Check 2、第一次“先学后教”。（补充句子） （一）出示学习指导 1) 复习情态动词 can 表示许可的用法； 2) 复习练习运用祈使句以及情态动词 have to 及 must 来表达一些规则。 （二）先学。 （1）根据单词提示学生独立完成填空题。 （2）比较难的题学生之间或者小组之间进行讨论完成任务。 （三）后教。 （！）教师公布答案，学生之间相互改作业。并且大家总结哪些题做得好而那些 题做得好。 （5） 师加强对做错题型的讲解及训练。 （四）当堂训练 . Presentation 1. Present some new words on the big screen. hair, learn, keep + 名词 + 形容词 2. Ss learn the new words and expressions. 3. Review the how to use have to and must; can and can't. Practice 1. T: Zhao Pei has many rules at home and at school. She's unhappy, too. She wants some help from Dr. Know. Read her letter below and fill in the blanks with have to /must, can /can't. 2. 指导：首先，认真阅读整篇短文，理解短文的大意。然后，认真阅读每个句 子，理解作者的对这些规则的看法；同时，推敲每个句子深处的意思，确定是用 have to/must 还是 can/can't。 最后，应再通读一遍短文，看自己所填写的词组是否通顺正确。 3. Check the answers. 2、第二次“先学后教”（补充句子，写短文） （一）出示学习指导。 1、根据例题完成填空题 2、完成 3a 部分，组织语言把它写成短文。 3、谈论表达自己对规则的想法或看法。 （二）先学。 （1）先让学生独立完成 Self Check。 （三）后教。 （2）教师公布答案,看谁做的最好，并且让做得好的学生总结一下自己是怎么做 的这些题，或者说说自己的学习方法，帮助后进生，做到相互学习的好习惯 （4）、当堂训练 . Writing 1. Let's work on 3b: We have many rules at home and at our school. Think what things you have to do and what things you can't do. Complete the chart with rules in your home and school. You can discuss with your partners in your group. 2. Ss discuss their rules in groups. Then fill in the blanks. Then check the rules you think are unfair. For example: You must wear a school uniform at school. You must keep your hair short at school. 3. Let some groups say their answers. Write some of the rules on the blackboard. . Writing 1. Now write a letter to Dr Know. Tell her about all the rules and how you feel about them. 2. 写作指导： 首先，可以再次阅读 2b 及 3a 中的短信的内容及格式。其次，模 仿这两封信的格式写好自己信件的格式；然后，根据刚才自己小组讨论的规则整 理成一封文字通顺的信件。并且，表达自己对这些规则的想法或看法。之后，以 礼貌的话语请求 Dr. Know 的帮助。最后，再通读一遍自己的短信看语句是否通顺。 3. Ss write the letter on the workbook. Exchange their workbook with their partner. Check the letters. 4. Let some Ss read their letter to the class. Correct the mistakes in the letter. . Self Check 1 1. Tell Ss they will read an interesting story about Timmy the Mouse. He's an funny mouse. Do you want to know what rules he has at home? Now read this short passage and fill in the blanks with the words in the box. 2. Ss read the short passage and try to fill in the blanks with the words in the box. 3. Check the answers. 4. Explain some sentences that Ss may have difficulty understanding them. . Self Check 2 1. Review the use of can/can't; have/must; don't have to。 2. Tell Ss they should use "can/can't; have/must; don't have to" to write about the rules at school. Write two sentences for each rule. 3. Ss work by themselves and write the rules on the workbook. 提示句子结构： 主语 + 情态动词 + 动词原形 + 其他 4. Let some Ss read their answers aloud. Correct any mistakes they have. Homework 1. Review the passages in Section B. 2. Retell the short passage about Timmy Mouse. 板书设计： We can’t be noisy in the library. Don’t be noisy in the library. We must/can speak English in the English class. We must/can eat in the dining hall. 课后反思： Unit 5 Why do you like pandas? （1a-2d） 1.板书课题：Unit 5 Why do you like pandas? 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 掌握以下单词：（能做到“四会”） tiger, elephant, panda, lion, koala, giraffe, cute, lazy, smart, beautiful, scary, kind, kind of, Australia, south, Africa, South Africa, pet, leg, cat, sleep （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 Section B 3a-Self Check 3a: can, must, have to, have to, can't, must, can't, must, can 3b: have to do: wear school uniform, keep hair short, eat in the dinning hall, keep quiet in the library… can't do: don't go out on school night, don't listen to music in the classroom, don't be late for class… Self Check 2: Don’t arrive late for class. We can’t arrive late for class. We must/ have to listen to our teachers at school. We can’t be noisy in the library. Don’t be noisy in the library. We must/can speak English in the English class. We must/can eat in the dining hall. 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 Do you like animals? Then have them to recall the animals they had learned and write them on the blackboard as he/she can. ( e.g. animals---sheep, monkey, cat, dog, mouse, cow, duck… ) Ⅱ. Presentation 1. Ask them to talk with their partners about the animals they like using the words they know (Four students a group). —What animals do you like? —Why do you like… —Because they’re… 2. Then show the class some pictures of animals and present other animals. And ask them: What’s this in English? It's a tiger. (Then lion, panda, elephant, koala, giraffe) Ss look at the picture and try to remember the new words of the animals. 3. Next, glue the pictures on the blackboard and ask one student to match the pictures with the words on the cards. Other students turn to page 25 and finish 1a. 4. Check the answers with the class. 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 Work on 1b. Tell Ss to listen to the tape and check the animals they hear in 1a. Play the recording again and check the answers with the class. Ⅴ. Pair work 1. Ask the students to imagine “ We are in the zoo, there are many kinds of animals here.” Then ask a student to do the model with you: — Let’s see the lions first. —Why? (why do you /does she /does he like lions?) —Because they are interesting. 2. Ss work with their partners practice the conversation using the animal in 1a. Ⅵ. Listening 1. Work on 2a; T: Listen to the conversation carefully. Then write the names of the animals you hear on these lines. Play the recording the first time. Students only listen. Play the recording a second time. This time students write in the names of the animals. Check the answers. Point out the adjectives and countries listed on the right. Ask a student to say the words. Say, Now I will play the recording again. This time draw a line between each animal and the adjective and countries you hear. Play the recording and have students match each animal with an adjective and a country. Correct the answers. 2. Work on 2b T: Listen again and complete the conversation with the words in 2a. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and write the answers. Check the answers with the class. Ⅶ. Pair work 1. Ask two students to read the conversation in 2b to the class. 2. Ss practice the conversation in pairs. 3. Then show the transcription on the big screen and practice the other two conversations in 2a. 4. Ss practice the conversations in pairs. 3、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）、用最快的速度朗读课文，理解课文大意，勾出不理解的短语，或语言点及语 法结构。 2）、能轻声跟读语音机注意句中的语气。 3）、回答课文相关问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 2) 能掌握以下句型： ① What animals do you/does she/ does he like? ② Let’s see the …? ③ Why do you/does she/ does he want to see …? ④ Because they are …. 2. 能力目标： ① To observe and describe animals. ② To talk about their preferences ③ To know the implied meaning of some animals （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 Ⅷ. Role-play 1. Ask Ss to look at the picture in 2d. Then Ss read the conversation in 2d and find the answers to the questions: ① Does Peter have a pet? ② What can Dingding do? ③ What pet does Jenny’s mom have? ④ Does Jenny like the cat? Why? 2. Ss read the conversations and try to find the answers to the questions. Check the answers: Yes, he does. He can walk on two legs. He can dance, too. She has a cat. No, she doesn’t. Because it’s very lazy. 3. Ss work in pairs and practice the conversation. 4. Let some pairs role-play the conversation. Homework: 1. Remember the new words and expressions in this period. 2. Role-play the conversation after class. 3. Write the animal's names as many as possible in the exercises book. 板书设计： 课后反思： Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 一、出示课题：Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 二、第一次先学后教.（ Grammar Focus.） 1、出示学习指导。 1) 继续练习运用如何做描述动物及表述自己对动物的喜好。 能掌握以下句型： —Why do you like …? —Because they're… 2) 继续学习谈论动物来自哪里，掌握以下句型： —Where are lions from? Section A (1a-2d) Drills： 1. —Let's see the lions. —Why do you want to see them? —Because they're interesting. 2b: elephants, kind of, South Africa 2c: ① Does Peter have a pet? ② What can Dingding do? ③ What pet does Jenny’s mom have? ④ Does Jenny like the cat? Why? —They're from South Africa. 2、先学。 让学生自己先读语法焦点，并找出语法结构。 Why do you like …? —Because they're…和 —Where are lions from? —They're from South Africa.的用法，以学案的方式呈现在大屏幕上，让学生自 主学习，并发现其用法。 3、后教。 （1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （2）教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区分 语法结构上的变化。 （3）教师讲解 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练 1.学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。 ① 你为什么喜欢熊猫？ _____________________ ② 因为它们有趣。 _____________________ ③ 约翰为什么喜欢考拉？___________________ ④ 因为它们很可爱。 ____________________ ⑤ 为什么你不喜欢老虎？_____________________ ⑥ 因为它们真得很吓人。___________________ … 2. Ss finish off the sentences and check the answers by themselves. 3. Give Ss eight more minutes to remember them. Ⅲ. Practice 1. Look at 3a. Tell Ss to fill in the blanks with the words from the box. Then practice the conversation. 2. 阅读指导： 首先，应通读对话的全文，理解大意。可知此对方是在谈论一些 动物来自哪里；以及双方所喜欢的动物及原因。其次，应重点阅读每个问答句的 意思，根据问句来确定答语中空格的意思或根据答语来确定问句中的意思。再次， 还要分析句子的结构看空格处在句子中是什么成份。比如：第一句是一个问句且 lions 是句子的主语，空格处应是本句的状语，再介词 from，可知空格处应填 where 来对地点提问。 3. 学生们根据上述阅读指导方法，自己认真阅读对话，并将对话内容补全完整。 4. Check the answers. （二）、第二次先学后教.（补充句子） 1、出示学习指导。 能够独立完成填空题 3a-3b。 2、先学。 1、让学生独立完成 Write questiongs and answer with the words and phrase.提醒学 生 but 的用法。 2、根据单词提示选单词，补充完整句子。 3、后教。 1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （6） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区分 语法结构上的变化。 （7） 教师讲解 but 的用法和 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练。 Ⅳ. Practice 1. Work on 3b. Tell Ss to write the names of animals in the blanks to make sentences that are true for you. e.g. I like cats because they are interesting. I like dogs because they are smart. I don't like lions because they are scary. 2. Ss work in groups. Discuss and write their sentences. 3. Let some Ss report their likes and dislikes. . Exercises 1. If time is enough do some more exercises on the screen. Homework 1. Read the sentences in Grammar Focus. 2. Think and describe an animal after class. Then write your sentences on the workbook. 板书设计 Section B(1a-2c) 课后反思: 1.板书课题：Section B(1a-2c) Section A Grammar Focus-3c —Why do you like pandas? —Because they're kind of interesting. —Where are lions from? —They're from South Africa. 3a: Where, They're, like, do, Why, because, don't, cool 3b: cats, dogs, lions, 3c: panda 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 能掌握以下单词：(能做到四会) friendly, shy, save, symbol, flag, forget, place, water, danger, cut, down, cut down, tree, kill, ivory, over （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 3、第一次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 2）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1）、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 2）、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 3）、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1）、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2）、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3）、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点 拔解决。 4）、 能掌握以下句型： ① —What animal do you like? —I like elephants. ② The elephants is one of Thailand's symbols. ③ Let's save the Elephants. （4）当堂训练。 Ⅱ. Presentation 1. Show some pictures on the big screen and teach Ss the new words. e.g. Show a picture of a shy girl, let Ss know she's shy. 2. Let Ss read aloud the words and expressions. 3. Give Ss some time and read aloud the words. Ⅲ. Learning 1. Pay attention to the animals in the picture in 1a and ask a student to say the name of each one. 2. Point out the list of eight numbered adjectives below. T: Now please match the adjectives with the animals in the picture. Write the letter of the animal on the line after the adjective. Point out the sample answer. 3. As students work, move around the room offering to answer questions as needed. 4. Correct the answers. Ⅳ. Listening Work on 1b: 1. T: Now I will play a recording of a conversation between Tony and Maria. This time circle the adjectives you bear on the list for la. 2. Ss listen and try to circle the adjectives in 1a. 3. Play the recording again for the Ss to check the answers. Work on 1c: 1. Call attention to the three headings. Animal, Maria's Words and Tony's Words, and the write-on lines under each. 2. Say, Now I will play the recording again. This time please write the name of the animals each person talks about and the words they say. 3. Play the first four lines of recording and stop the tape. Ask, What animal are they talking about? What words does Mary use to describe the elephant? Point out the write-on lines where students can write these words. 4. Play the whole recording and have students write the words they hear on the chart. 5. Check the answers. 2、第二次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2）画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 3）了解课文内容，回答老师提出的课文相关联的问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 Reading 1. Fast reading T: Now, read the passage quickly and find the answer to this question: When is Thai Elephant Day? (March 13th.) Ss read the passage quickly and try to find the answer to this question. Check the answers. 2. Careful reading T: Now read the passage again and find the answers to these questions (on the big screen): ① What do the students from Thailand wan to do? ② What can Elephants do? ③ Why are elephants in great danger? ④ What's the best title for this article? (check) Ss read the questions first. Then read the passage again and find the answers to the questions. Check the answers with the class. . Reading 1. Tell the students to look at the map in 2c. There are four box around the word "Elephant". The first box is about the importance of the elephants in Thailand. The second box is about the abilities of the elephants. The third box is about the facts and figures of the elephants. The last box is about how to save the elephants. Let's read the passage again and fill in the blanks. 2. 阅读指导： 1) 认真看一遍这四个表格，明确每个表格是关于大象的那个方面的情况。 2）然后，再读短文一遍，找到相关的内容的依据。仔细读相关内容，分析空格 处应当填写的单词。比如：第一个方框中讲大象在泰国的重要性，通过读短文可 知依据应是短文的第一段。由最后两句话“我们的第一国旗上面有一只白色的大 象，这是好运的象征。”可知第一个空格处应填写 elephant；第二个空格处应填 luck。其他与此类似。 3）最后，再读自己所填写的空格及依据，看是否有错误。 3. Ss read the article and fill in the blanks in the map. 4. Check the answers with the Ss. Homework 1. Remember the new words and expressions learned in this period. 2. Ask Ss to retell the article according to the map in 2c. 板书设计： 课后反思: Section B 3a-Self Check 一、出示课题：Section B 3a-Self Check 二、 第一次“先学后教”。（补充句子） （一）出示学习指导 1) 复习本单元所学的动物的名称以及描述动物的形容词。 2) 能正确运用所学的相关知识描述动词，表达自己的喜好。 Section B 1a-2c 1. friendly, shy, cute, lazy, small, scary, beautiful, smart 2. —What animal do you like? —I like elephants. They're cute. I like dogs, too. —Why? —Because they're friendly and smart. 3. When is Thai Elephant Day? (March 13th.) 4. ① What do the students from Thailand wan to do? ② What can Elephants do? ③ Why are elephants in great danger? ④ What's the best title for this article? (check) 3）通过不同方式的练习来熟练表达自己的喜好及描述不同的动物 （二）先学。 （1）根据单词提示学生独立完成填空题。 （2）比较难的题学生之间或者小组之间进行讨论完成任务。 （三）后教。 （！）教师公布答案，学生之间相互改作业。并且大家总结哪些题做得好而那些 题做得好。 （8） 师加强对做错题型的讲解及训练。 （四）当堂训练 Ⅱ. Presentation 1. Show some picture on the big screen. Learn the new sentence structure. (a beautiful butterfly) Isn't it beautiful? (a tall tree) Is it tall? … 2. Ss try to understand the use of the sentence structure. Then try to make their own sentences. Ⅲ. Practice 1. T: Becky is Jill's favorite animal. Fill in the blanks with the words in the box. 2. 阅读指导：首先，通读小短文，看短文中描述或介绍了 Becky 的那些方面； 其次，读方框中的选项，明白每个单词的意思。然后，认真读短文，分析每个空 格所在句子的意思，确定每个空格的意思，然后补全空格。最后，通读一遍短文， 看短文是否通顺，确定所填空的单词是否正确。 3. Ss read and fill in the blanks. 4. Check the answers. 5. Explain "Isn’t she beautiful? " Ⅳ. Writing 1. T: Do you know Beibie, Jinging, Huanhuan, Yingying? Yeah, they're four pandas in China. Now look at a picture of Beibei. Do you like her? Can you write a short article to introduce her? You can use the words and expressions below. (five years old, China, cute, Beijing Zoo) 2. 写作指导： 首先，应介绍它的岁数，来自哪里；然后，可以介绍它的特性比 如 cute, beautiful, shy 等。然后，介绍你为什么喜欢它的原因；最后，可以介绍 一下它现在在北京动物园里。并通读一遍短文，看是否通顺无误。 3. Ss try to write a short article about Beibei. 4. Let some Ss read their article to the class. 5. Present a possible version on the big screen and let Ss correct their article. 2、第二次“先学后教”（补充句子，写短文 ） （一）出示学习指导。 1、根据例题完成填空题 2、完成 3a 部分，组织语言把它写成短文。 （二）先学。 （1）先让学生独立完成 Self Check。 （三）后教。 （2）教师公布答案,看谁做的最好，并且让做得好的学生总结一下自己是怎么做 的这些题，或者说说自己的学习方法，帮助后进生，做到相互学习的好习惯 （4）、当堂训练 Ⅴ. Self Check 1 1. We learned many animals and descriptions in this unit. Let's have a review of the animals and descriptions. Now work in groups and write more words in the chart below. 2. Ss work in groups and add more words in the chart. 3. Let some Ss write the answers on the blackboard. Let other Ss add more words. 4. Ok. Now let's make sentences with the animals and descriptions. I like…because… I don't like… because they are… I think … are really… …are very… 5. Ss work in groups try to make five sentences each group. 6. Let some groups read out their sentences. Ⅵ. Self Check 2 1. There are some questions and some answers in the chart. Please read the sentences below and match the questions and answers to make a conversation. 2. Check the answers with the Ss. 3. Now, you can make your own conversations with your partner. 4. Ss make their own conversations and act out the conversation. Homework 1. Review the conversations and passages in Section B. 2. Write a short article about an animal your like. 板书设计： Unit 6 I’m watching TV. Section A 1 (1a-2d) Section B 3a-Self Check 3a: beautiful, Africa, years, like, because, lives 3b: One possible version: Beibei is my favorite animal. She's from China. She's five years old. I like her because she is cute and shy. She lives in Beijing Zoo. … Self Check 1: Where are they from? They're from Africa. lion, really scary, kind of boring; elephants, cute, very big; funny…. 1、出示课题：Unit 6 I’m watching TV. Section A 1 (1a-2d 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 1) 能掌握以下单词：(能做到四会 ) newspaper, use, soup, wash, movie, just… （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 Ⅱ. Presentation 1. Show some pictures on the big screen. Present the new words and expressions. 2. Ss watch and learn the new words and expressions. 3. Give Ss some time and try to remember the new words and expressions. 4. (Show some pictures on the screen and ask some students to perform the actions.) e.g. T: What are you doing? S: I am doing homework. (Help him/her to answer) T: What is he /she doing? Ss: He /she is doing homework. Teach: watching TV, cleaning, reading a book, eating dinner, talking on the phone...as the same way. 5. Work on 1a. Ss read the activities and look at the pictures. Then match the activities with pictures. 6. Check the answers with the Ss. 第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 4、掌握句型： ① —What are you doing? —I'm watching TV. ② —What's he doing? —He's using the computer. ③ —What are they doing? —They're listening to a CD. ④ —This is Jenny. —It's Laura here. . Listening 1. T: What are Jenny, John, Dave and Mary doing? Now let’s listen to the tape, find out the right activities from 1a. 2. Play the recording for the Ss twice. 3. Ss listen to the recording and write the numbers from 1a. . Pair work 1. Ask the Ss to read the conversations in 1c with a partner. Then look at the pictures in 1a. And conversations about other person in the picture. 2. Ss make conversations by themselves and practice the conversations. . Listening 1. Work on 2a; T: Jack and Steve are talking on the phone. What are they doing now? Listen to the conversations and match the answers with the questions. (Play the recording for the first time, students only listen carefully. Then, listen to the recording again, and match the answers with the questions. ) Check the answers. 2. Work on 2b. Let Ss read the conversation in 2b first. Then play the recording for the Ss twice. The first time Ss only listen and write down the words in the blanks. Then play the recording again for the Ss to check the answers. (If necessary, press the Pause button to help.) . Pair work 1. Now, role-play the conversation with your partners. 2. Let some pairs to act out the conversation in front of the class. 第三次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 （2）、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1）、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、 差） 2）、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3）、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 4) 能掌握语法：现在进行时态的用法。 5) 能运用所学的知识，描述人们正在干的事情 Role-play 1. Ask Ss to read the conversation in 2d and answer the questions below. ① Are Jenny and Laura talking on the phone? (Yes, they are.) ② What's Laura doing now? (She's washing her clothes.) ③ What's Jenny doing? (She's watching TV.) ④ When do they meet at Jenny's home? (At half past six.) 2. Ss read the conversation and answer the questions above. 3. Check the answers with the Ss. 4. Let Ss work in pairs and role-play the conversation. Homework: 1. Review the words and expressions in this period. 2. Understand the knowledge about the present progressive tense. 3. Make five sentences on what are you doing now. 板书设计： Section A1 (1a-2d) Drills： 1. —What are you doing? —I'm watching TV. 2. —What's he doing? —He's using the computer. 3. —What are they doing? —They're listening to a CD. 2b: are, doing; watching TV. listening to a CD, boring, interesting, go 2d. ① Are Jenny and Laura talking on the phone?(Yes, they are.) ② What's Laura doing now? (She's washing her clothes.) ③ What's Jenny doing? (She's watching TV.) ④ When do they meet at Jenny's home? (At half past six.) 课后反思： Section A 2 (Grammar Focus-3c) 一、出示课题：Section A 2 (Grammar Focus-3c) 二、第一次先学后教.（ Grammar Focus.） 1、出示学习指导。 1) 继续练习运用现在进行时态来谈论人们正在做的事情。 2） 掌握现在时行时态的结构及用法。 3）掌握动词的现在分词形式的构成方式。 能掌握以下句型： ①—What’s he/she doing? —She's/He's washing the clothes. ② —What are they doing? —They are listening to a CD. ③—Is he reading a newspaper? —Yes, he is./No, he isn't. ④ —Are they using the computer? —Yes, they are./ No, they aren't. 2、先学。 1）让学生自己先读语法焦点，并找出语法结构。 2）掌握现在时行时态的结构及用法 。 3）掌握动词的现在分词形式的构成方式。 3、后教。 （1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （2）、教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区 分语法结构上的变化。 （3） 教师讲解 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练 Grammar Focus 3a-3b （二）、第二次先学后教.（补充句子） 1、出示学习指导。 能够独立完成填空题 3a-3b。 2、先学。 1、让学生独立完成 Write questiongs and answer with the words and phrase.提醒学 生 but 的用法。 2、根据单词提示选单词，补充完整句子。 3、后教。 1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （3） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比， 区分语法结构上的变化。 （4） 教师讲解 but 的用法和 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练。 Ⅱ. Grammar Focus. 1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。 ① 你在做什么事情？_____________________ ② 我在看电视。 __________________ ③ 她在做什么事情？___________________ ④ 她在洗衣服。 ____________________ ⑤ 他们在做什么？___________________ ⑥ 他们在听 CD。 ___________________ ⑦ 你在做作业吗？__________________________ ⑧ 是的。/ 不是。 __________________________ 2. Ss work by themselves and check the answers with each other. 3. Give Ss seven more minutes to remember the sentences. 4. 自主学习有关现在进行时态的语法知识学案 现在时行时态 一、用法：1. 表示现在（说话瞬间）正在进行或发生的动作。例如： 我正在做作业。 I’m _______ my homework now. 他们在操场上踢足球。 They’re ________ soccer on the playground. 2. 也可表示当前一段时间内的活动或现阶段正在进行的动作。例如： 这些天来，我们在做一架模型飞机。 We are ____________________ these days 二、句子结构： 1. 陈述句：主语+ be (am, is, are) not + V. –ing +… 我正在洗衣服。 ________________________________ 2. 一般疑问句： Be(Am, Is, Are) + 主语 + V.-ing … 她正在弹钢琴吗？ ______________________________ 三、常用时间状语： now, right now 或表示现在情景的 Look, listen 等。 格林先生现在正在写一个故事。 四、 与一般现在时态的区别 一般现在时态表示经常性、习惯性的动作；谓语动词为原形或第三人称单 数形式； 时间状语常为 usually, often, sometimes, on Monday, every day 琳达通常在早上冲个澡。 ___________________________________ 4、当堂训练。 Practice 1. Work on 3a. Now let's write sentences following the examples. 指导：这个练习题是帮助同学们理解现在时行时态与一般现在时态的区别用法； 同学们应根据上述语法学习内容来造句子。首先，应明确一般现在时态的句子结 构，和现在进行时态的句子结构。然后，看提示词中的时间状语，确定是用什么 时态。然后，写出正确恰当的句子。 2. Ss write the sentences with the help the words and expressions. 3. Check the answers with the Ss. . Practice 1. Work on 3b. Tell Ss to number the sentences in order to make a telephone conversation. Then practice it with a partner. 2. 阅读指导： 首先，应明确这是一个电话会谈，因此应先通读所有的句子。然 后，理解大意的基础上，找出首句。然后，顺藤摸瓜，依次找出下面的对话内容。 最后，全面的读一遍对话，看是否通顺合理。 通过读对话，可知 What are you doing? 应是第一句话；这样，I'm reading a book. 就是第二句话…… 3. Ss read all the sentences and number the conversation. 4. Practice the conversation with a partner. . Exercises 1. If time is enough, do more exercises on the big screen. Homework 1. Read the sentences in Grammar Focus. 2. What are your family members doing now? Write five sentences on what they're doing now. 板书设计 Section A 2Grammar Focus-3c 一、现在时行时态： 1. 表示现在（说话瞬间）正在进行或发生的动作。 2. 也可表示当前一段时间内的活动或现阶段正在进行的动作。 二、句子结构： 1. 陈述句：主语+ be (am, is, are) not + V. –ing +… 2. 一般疑问句： Be(Am, Is, Are) + 主语 + V.-ing … 三、常用时间状语： 课后反思: Section B 1 1a-2c 1.板书课题：Section B 1 1a-2c 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导（能做到四会） 掌握以下单词： pool, shop, supermarket, man, host, study, state, the United States, American, dragon, young, race, say, other, children, miss, wish, delicious, living room （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 3、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 2）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 2、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 3、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点 拔解决。 （4）当堂训练。 . Listening Work on 1c: 1. T: Now I will play a recording of a conversation. This time write the places you hear in the chart. 2. Ss listen and write the places. 3. Play the recording again for the Ss to check the answers. . Listening Work on 1d: 1. This time, please listen to the recording and write the activities you hear in the chart. 2. Play recording and stop the tape if necessary. 3. Play the whole recording and have students write the words they hear in the chart. 4. Check the answers. 4、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2）画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 3）了解课文内容，回答老师提出的课文相关联的问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 4、能掌握以下句型： ① —What time is it in Beijing? —It's eight o'clock in the morning. ② —It's 9:00 a.m. and Zhu Hui's family are at home. ③ —Zhu Hui misses his family and wishes to have his mom's delicious zongzi. （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 . Reading 1. Fast Reading Read the article and answer the two questions. ① Why are Zhu Hui's family watching boat race and making zongzi? ② Does Zhu Hui like his host family? What about his home in China? Ss read the article quickly and find the answers to the two questions. Check the answers with the class. 2. Careful Reading Read the article again. What are these people doing now? Then fill in the chart below. Places Shenzhen Time his dad and uncle his mom and aunt Places New York Time the mother the father Zhuhui Ss read the article and fill in the blanks. Then check the answers with the class. 3. Work on 2c Now let's look at the chart in 2c. You should match the verbs in column A with the words in column B. Then use the phrase to write sentences according to the TV report. Make sure Ss know what to do. 阅读指导： 1) 读表格中的词汇，根据短文内容，将左右两栏的内容连在一起。 2）可以先将记得清楚的词汇连在一起，最后连较较为模糊一点的词组。 3）带着这些词组再去读短文，找到相关词组的地方，然后明确所连的词组是否 正确。 4）比照课本上的句子，再用这些词组造句子。 学生们按老师指导的思路进行学习活动，最后，将所造的句子写在练习本上，并 将相互检查所造句子的正确与否。 Homework 1. Ask Ss retell the article after class. 2. Use the following words to make sentences 1. in the United States 2. live with 3. any other 4. talk on the phone 5. miss 6. wish to do sth. 板书设计： Section B2 3a-Self Check 一、出示课题：Section B2 3a-Self Check 二、第一次“先学后教”。（补充句子） （一）出示学习指导 1) 复习巩固掌握本课出现的生词及表达方式。 2) 进一步练习运用现在进行时态的句子来描述他人在做的事情。 3) 通过不同形式的练习，提高学生们综合运用所学知识的能力。 （二）先学。 （1）根据单词提示学生独立完成填空题。 （2）比较难的题学生之间或者小组之间进行讨论完成任务。 （三）后教。 （！）教师公布答案，学生之间相互改作业。并且大家总结哪些题做得好而那些 题做得好。 Section B 1 1a-2c 1a: 1. library; 2. swimming 3. supermarket, shopping, 4. playground, playing basketball 2b: ① Why are Zhu Hui's family watching boat race and making zongzi? ② Does Zhu Hui like his host family? What about his home in China? Shenzhen New York time the mother the father Zhuhui （2） 师加强对做错题型的讲解及训练。 （四）当堂训练 . Presentation 1. Show a photo of the teacher's family. T: Look! This is a photo of my family. What are my family doing? 2. Ask some Ss ask and answer about the photo. S1: What's our teacher doing? S2: She's reading a book. S1: What's his daughter doing? S2: She's playing with her friends. S1: What's Mrs. Li doing? S2: She's using the computer. . Practice 1. T: OK. Yesterday, I asked you to take a photo of your family to school? Have you got it? (Ss take out their photos.) 2. Now work with your partners. Ask and answer about the pictures. 3. Ss work in pairs. Ask and answer about the pictures as S1 and S2 did. 4. Let some pairs ask and answer their photos. 2、第二次“先学后教”（补充句子，写短文） （一）出示学习指导。 1、根据例题完成填空题 2、完成 3a 部分，组织语言把它写成短文。 （二）先学。 （1）先让学生独立完成 Self Check。 （三）后教。 （1）教师公布答案,看谁做的最好，并且让做得好的学生总结一下自己是怎么做 的这些题，或者说说自己的学习方法，帮助后进生，做到相互学习的好习惯 (2)写作格式及要求 （4）、当堂训练 Ⅳ. Writing 1. Let's look at Jim's family photo and read his letter to Bob. Try to fill in the blanks. 2. 写作指导：首先，应阅读信的内容。认真读每一个句子，找出句子的主语， 明 确本句话所说的人物；然后，看图画中该人物正在做的事情。用正确的时态写出 此人物正在做的事情。 3. 学生们按老师的指导意见，阅读、看图画并补全信件的内容。 4. 相互交换信件，并检测有没有错误。让几名同学读自己的短文，给同学们做 一个例子。 Ⅴ. Self Check 1 1. 让学生们看表格，讲一讲每一列所代表的意思。 2. 学生明白本表是讲动词的现在分词的构成方式后，让学生们自己从课本找学 过的单词写在表格里。 3. 在大屏幕上呈献更多的单词，让学生们做参考。 Ⅵ. Self Check 2 1. Tell Ss A and B are talking about what they are doing now. Read the conversation and write questions with the help of the words in the bracket. 2. Ss read the conversation and try to make questions with the help of the words in the bracket. 3. Check the answers with the class. 4. Have Ss role-play the conversation. Homework 总结动词现在分词的变化规则，并整理在笔记，做强化记 课后反思： Unit 7 It’s raining. Section A (1a-2d) 2. 情感态度价值观目标： 教育学生善于观察天气，善于调整自己的情绪；了解世界各地的天气情况， 增加世界观念。知道大自然的力量是神奇而伟大的，我们应当好好学习，立志学 好科学知识，为长大后探索神奇的大自然，打好基础。 二、教学重难点 Section B 3a-Self Check 3a: are watching TV; is reading a newspaper, is doing his homework 3b: One possible version: My family are all at home today. My father is cleaning his car outside. My mother is cooking in the kitchen. My sister is playing computer games. My grandparents are watching TV in the living room. Self Check 1: read-reading; draw-drawing; live-living, have-having, save-saving; sit-sitting, shop-shopping, put-putting Self Check 2: What are you doing? Let's play soccer. What is Tony doing? Is Steve studying, too? 1. 教学重点： 1) The vocabulary and useful expressions. 2) —How’s the weather? —It's raining/ windy. 3) —What are you doing? —I'm playing basketball. 2. 教学难点： 运用目标语言来对天气进行问答，并且会问答其他人正在进行的活动。 三、教学过程 1.板书课题：Unit 7 It’s raining. Section A (1a-2d) 1、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 1) 能掌握以下单词：（能做到四会） rain, windy, cloudy, sunny, snow, weather, cook, bad, park message, take a message, could, back, problem （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 . Presentation 1. (Show some pictures of the weather) Let Ss look at the pictures and ask them how the weather is. Ss learn the new words and expressions with the help of the pictures. 2. Look at the pictures in 1a. Then read the new words on the right. Ask the Ss to match the words with pictures. 3. Check the answers. 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 . Listening 1. Now let's look at the city names in the box in 1b. Please read after me. Ss read the cities after the teacher. 2. Now, We’ll hear four conversations. Listen carefully, point out each city in the picture as it comes upon the tape. Play the recording a second time. Ask Ss to write the name of the city in the picture of its weather. 3. Check the answers. . Pair work 1. Tell the Ss: If you are in one of the places in the picture above. Talk about the weather with your friends in another city on the phone. 2. Make a model with a student like this: T: Hi! How's the weather in Beijing? S1: It's sunny. 3. Ss work in pairs. Ask and answer about the weather in the cities. Listening 1. Work on 2a. Let's see what Joe's families are doing. Point to the 4 pictures. 2. Ask Ss tell each person is doing in each picture. More attentions should be paid to the correct use of the Present Progressive Tense. 3. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the pictures [1-4]. 4. Play the tape for Ss to check the answers. 5. With the whole picture, get some Ss to tell the story of it. 6. Brainstorming Play the tape for another time. Then do a memory test. Ask Ss: What's Uncle Joe/Jeff/Mary/Aunt Sarah doing? What're Scott and Lucy doing? Is Jeff watching TV? etc. 7. Let Ss match the names with the activities in 2b. Play the recording for the Ss to check the answers. Ⅶ. Pair work 1. Look at the pictures and talk about the people in 2a with a partner. 2. Ask a student the questions as a model: T: What's Uncle Joe doing? S1: He's playing basketball. 3. Ss work in pairs. Ask and answer about the pictures. 第三次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 3) 能用所学的知识描述天气情况。 4）描述正在发生的动作。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 4、能掌握以下句型： ① —How's the weather in Beijing? —It's sunny. ② —Can I take a message for him? —Yes. Could you just tell him to call me back? —Sure, no problem. Exercises Homework: 一、总结有关天气的词汇。 二、编写三个有关天气问答的对话。 1. windy 2. raining 3. snowy 板书设计： Section A (1a-2d) Drills： 1. —How's the weather in Beijing? —It's sunny. 2. —What's Uncle Joe doing? —He is playing basketball. 2c: —What's Uncle Joe doing? —He's playing basketball. —What's Aunt Sally doing? —She's cooking. —What's Mary doing? —She's watching TV. Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 一、出示课题：(Grammar Focus-3b)(Grammar Focus-3c) 课后反思: Grammar Focus 二、第一次先学后教.（ Grammar Focus.） 1、出示学习指导。 1) 继续练习运用描述天气情况、描述正在发生的动作。 2) 通过多种形式的练习方式来让学生们熟练掌握描述天气情况及描述正发 生的事情。 2、先学。 （3） 让学生自己先读语法焦点，并找出语法结构。 老师将情态动词的 can 的用法，以学案的方式呈现在大屏幕上，让学生自主学习， 并发现其用法。 3、后教。 （1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （2） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区 分语法结构上的变化。 4、当堂训练 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision 1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions in period 1. 2. Ask some pairs to role-play the conversation in 2d. Ⅱ. Grammar Focus. 1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。 ① 天气怎么样？ _____________________ 天气多云。/天气晴朗。/天在下雨。 ____________________ ② 你在做什么？ ___________________ 我在做饭。 ___________________ ③ 他们在做什么？ ____________________ 他们正在公园里打篮球。 _____________________ ④ 他在做什么？ _________________________________ 他在他朋友家里学习。 _______________________________ ⑤ 情况怎么样？ ___________________ 很好！/不错。/ 糟糕！ ____________________ 2. Ss fill in the blanks and check the answers themselves. 3. 探究乐园 ① 疑问副词 how 用来询问天气。 今天天气怎么样？ _______ the weather today? 【拓展】询问天气还可以说：_______ the weather _______ ? ② how 用于问候，打招呼 你好吗？_________________________ 你那里情况如何？ _____________________ ③ how 用来询问方式或手段。 你怎样去上学？ _______do you go to school? ④ how 用来询问年龄 你弟弟多大年龄？ _______ _______ is your brother? ⑤ how 用于询问价格 那件紫色的毛衣多少钱？ _____________ are the purple sweater? 4. Ss read the sentences and learn by themselves. Ⅲ. Practice 1. Work on 3a. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in the box. Then practice the conversations with a partner. 2.指导： 根据上下文的问句和答语来确定空格处的意思, 特别是每个空格后面的 词汇。 根据上下文的时态及时间状语来确定句子的时态。如: right now 为现在进 行时态的时间状语。而 usually，every Saturday 及 every day 是一般现在 时态的时间状语。 现在进行时态的句子结构：be (am, is, are) + 动词的 ing 形式; 一般现在时 态的句子用动词的原形或第三人称单数形式。如: 第一题由问句可知答句 为现在进行时。后一句为一般现在时。 3. Ss read the conversations and fill in the blanks. 4. Check the answers with the class. 5. Ss practice the conversation in pairs. 6. Ask some pairs role-play the conversation. 三、第二次先学后教.（补充句子） 1、出示学习指导。 能够独立完成填空题 3a-3b。 2、先学。 1、让学生独立完成 Write questions and answer with the words and phrase.提醒学 生 but 的用法。 2、根据单词提示选单词，补充完整句子。 3、后教。 1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （3） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区 分语法结构上的变化。 （4） 教师讲解 but 的用法和 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练。 . Practice 1. Work on 3b. Yuan Yuan from CCTV is interviewing people in five different places. Fill in the chart below. 2. Ss work in groups. Discuss the pictures and talk about the weather and what the people doing. Make a model for the Ss: —How's the weather in Picture a? —It's sunny. —What's the boy doing? —He's playing the guitar. 3. Ss ask and answer about the pictures. Then fill in the blanks. 4. Check the answers with the class. Homework 1. Read the sentences in Grammar Focus. 2. Make some conversation about the weather and the activities. 板书设计 Section A Grammar Focus-3c 1. —How's it going? —Great! / Not bad./ Terrible. —What are they doing? —They're playing basketball in the park. 3a: 1. am doing; do; 2. is playing, plays; 3. Is, studying; is studying 4. are making, make; 5. Is, talking; talks 3b: —It's sunny. —He's playing the guitar. —It's windy. —They're walking to school. —It's cold. —They're making soup. 课后反思： Section B 1a-2c 1、出示课题：Section B 1a-2c 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 1) 能掌握以下单词：（能做到四会） dry, cold, hot, warm, visit, Canada, summer, sit, juice, soon, vacation, hard, Europe, mountains, country （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 Presentation 1. Show some pictures on the big screen. Present the new words. dry, cold, hot, warm … 2. Ss learn the new words and expressions and try to understand the expressions. 3. Give Ss some time and try to remember the new words and expressions. Matching 1. Read the words in the box in 1a. Then look at the pictures. Match the words with the pictures. . Pairwork 1. Look at the pictures in 1a. Ask and answer questions about the weather in the pictures in 1a. Give an example to the Ss. T: How's the weather in the picture d? S1: It's dry. 2. Now work in pairs. Ask and answer about questions about the weather in the pictures in 1a. 3、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 2）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 2、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 3、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3. Ask some pairs to ask and answer about the questions. . Listening work on 1c: 1. Read the chart in 1c. 2. Play the tape for the Ss to listen and write what Mary and Eric answer to "How's it going?". 3. Play the recording twice. The first time Ss only listen. For the second Ss listen and write down the words in the blanks. . Listening Work on 1d: 1. Listen again. What does Eric answer to "What are you doing?" & "How's the weather?" 2. Play the recording twice. The first time Ss only listen. For the second Ss listen and write down the words in the blanks. 3. Check the answers. Talking 1. Look at the pictures in 2a. Talk about the pictures with a partner. How's the weather? What are the people doing? Make a model to the Ss. S1: How's the weather in picture a? S2: It's sunny and warm. S1: What's the girl doing? S2: She's sitting near the pool and drinking some juice. 2. Ss work in pairs and talk about the pictures. 3. Let some pairs ask and answer the pictures aloud. 4、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2）画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 3）了解课文内容，回答老师提出的课文相关联的问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 2) 能掌握以下句型： ① —How's it going? —Not too bad. ② Are you studying hard or having fun? ③ I'm having a great time in Europe. （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 . Reading 1. Fast Reading Read the postcards in 2b and math each postcard with the correct picture in 2a. Ss read the postcards quickly and match the postcard the correct picture. Then check the answers. 2. Careful reading: Read the first postcard again and find the answers to these questions. ① Where is Su Lin now? ② What is Su Lin studying here? ③ Is she visiting some of his old friends there? ④ What’s she doing right now? ⑤ How’s the weather there? Read the second postcard again and find the answers to these questions. ① Where is Dave now? ② What are Dave and his family doing there? ③ Are they having a good time? ④ How’s the weather there? ⑤ How’s the weather in Jane’s country? Ss read the postcards and try to find the answers to the questions. Then check the answers with the class. . After Reading 1. Read the postcards again and fill in the chart with the information from the postcards in 2b. 2. 阅读指导： 1) 先看表格，可知本题要求我们读明信片，完成 Sun Lin 和 Wen Wei 现在 在哪里在、那里的天气如何以及他们正在做的事情这三项内容。 2) 带着三个问题，分别去在 Sun Lin 和 Wen Wei 所写的明信片中去寻找相 关内容。 3) 找到相关依据后，再认真分析这三个问题的正确答案，然后填写在空格 处。 3. Check the answers with Ss. Language points I. Exercise Homework 1. Remember the new words and expressions learned in this period. 2. Retell the first postcard in 2b. 板书设计： Section B 1a-2c 1a：1. d; 2. e; 3. a; 4. b; 5. c 1b: —How's the weather in picture d? —It's warm. —How's the weather in picture a? —It's cold —How's the weather in picture b? —It's cool. —How's the weather in picture c? —It's hot. —How's the weather in picture d? —It's dry. 2b: ① Where is Su Lin's uncle work? ② What is Su Lin doing in Canada? ③ Are Wen Wei and family having a great time? ④ Why can't Wen Wei call Jane? 课后反思： Section B 3a-Self Check 一． 第一次“先学后教”。（补充句子） （一）出示学习指导 1) 复习与运用所学的有关天气的相关知识来描述天气。 2) 能正确地描述他人正在进行的活动。 3）能根据所提供的相关材料描写某地的天气情况及某人正在进行的活动。 （二）先学。 （1）根据单词提示学生独立完成填空题。 （2）比较难的题学生之间或者小组之间进行讨论完成任务。 （三）后教。 （！）教师公布答案，学生之间相互改作业。并且大家总结哪些题做得好而那些 题做得好。 （5） 师加强对做错题型的讲解及训练。 （四）当堂训练 Presentation 1.Show some pictures on the big screen and present some new words and expressions in this period. (skate, snowy, winter, Russian, snowman) 2. Ss read the new words and try to remember them. Free talk Finish some exercises. 二、第二次“先学后教”（补充句子，写短文） （一）出示学习指导。 1、根据例题完成填空题 2、完成 3a 部分，组织语言把它写成短文。 （二）先学。 （1）先让学生独立完成 Self Check。 （三）后教。 （1）教师公布答案,看谁做的最好，并且让做得好的学生总结一下自己是怎么做 的这些题，或者说说自己的学习方法，帮助后进生，做到相互学习的好习惯 (2)写作格式及要求。 （4）、当堂训练 . Writing 1. T: Here's another postcard from Kate to Xiao Lu. Look at the pictures on the postcard. How's the weather there? And what is the girl doing? Let some Ss answer the two questions. 2. Let some Ss read the words in the box. Explain the meaning of the words that they don't know. 3. 思路指导： 首先, 应读方框里的单词, 掌握每个单 词的意思。 其次, 通读一遍短文, 理解短文大意。 然后, 认真读每个句子, 分析每个空格处前后上下文的意思，确定空格 处所缺单词的意思。如：第一、二两空格前有 weather 一词，可知空格 处只应填 snowy 和 windy 一词。第三空格后面有“俄罗斯面包”一词可推 知，空格处应为 buying 一词。第四空格由空格后面的 on a river 可知应 是“skate”一词。最后一空格是 take a photo of …，应用现在进行时态， 故填 taking。 4. 学生们在老师的指导方法下，读信的内容，然后补全短文内容。 5. Check the answers. . Writing 2. 写作指导： 回想一下给你印象最深的一次度假活动。 可以将在 3b 中问题的答语, 做为写作的内容。 假想你现在正在度假。将回答问题的几个句子连起来，形成一个语句连 贯的短文。 注意，应用现在进行时态来表述现在正在发生的事情。 3. 学生们根据老师的指导方法，大胆地进行写作，发挥自己的想像力，写 出好的内容。 4. Let Ss read their postcard to the class. Self Check 1 1. Tell Ss we've learned some words about feelings, weather and activities. Now discuss with your partners. Add more words in the box. 2. Ss work in pairs and add more words in the box. 3. Let some Ss read their words. Let other Ss add more words. . Self Check 2 1.Read the sentences below on the left and find the responses on the right. 2.思路指导： 首先，应通读所有选项，掌握对话的大意。可知本对话是一个打电话的情 景，由打电话的常识可知左栏第一句话为首句，句意为“你好，我是詹妮” 可知答语应是右栏中的第二句话。 由左栏第二句末的“我可以给她带个话吗？”一句可以确定其答语为右栏中 的第三句话，“好的。你可以让她打电话 876-54321 吗？”。 当 A 方回答“没问题”后，B 方应当表示感谢。 3. Ss read the sentences below and find the responses. 4. Check the answers with the class. Then let the Ss practice the conversation with a partner. Self Check 3 1. Put these sentences in order to make a conversation. Then write your own conversation. 2. 思路指导： 本题要求将一对话排列正确的说话顺序。 首先，通读所有的句子，理解对话的大意。 其次，在通读对话的基础上确定对话的首句应是打招呼的“Hi, Jill”一句。 接下来，就可以确定“Not too bad.”是第二句。 比较询问天气的问句和询问在下雨天里在做什么事情，可知应先问天气情 况。 最后，通读一遍对话，看是否通顺。 3. 学生们按指导方法，将对话的顺序排好。然后和伙伴练习这个对话。 4. 与伙伴共同编造一个与之相仿的对话。并向本小组的其他同学表演一下。 Homework 找一张你度假时照的照片，写一篇小短文向你的同学们介绍一下当时你度假 的情况。包括以下内容如下：  在何地度假  天气情况  你们正在进行的活动  你对假期的感受 板书设计： Unit 8 Is there a post office near here? Unit 8 Is there a post office near here? Section A (1a-2d) 1、 出示课题：Unit 8 Is there a post office near here? Section B 3a-Self Check 3a: snowy, windy; buying, playing, skating, talking Self Check 2: A：Hello? Jenny speaking. B: Hi, Jenny. It's Steve here. May I speak to Lucy, please? A：Sorry, she's not at home. Can I take a message? B: Yes. Could you ask her to call me at 8765-4321? A: Sure. No problem. B: Thank you. Bye. Section A (1a-2d) 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 能掌握以下单词：（能做到四会） post, office, post office, police, police station, hotel, restaurant, bank, hospital, street, pay, near, across, across from, front, in front of, behind, town, around （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 . Presentation: 1. T: Hello, class, how to ay about a general question and negative of “there be” S: When it is a general question, “be” should be put in the first word of a sentence. When it is negative, it should add “not” behind “be”. T: T: Excellent, then please think about What a positive answer and a negative answer are? S: A positive answer is “Yes, there is “or “Yes, there are.” A negative answer is “No, there isn’t “, or “No, there aren’t.” T: Good. Now please finish the following exercises: 1) There ______ (be) a lot of books on the desk. 2) There ______ (be) a bank and two ________ (library) on the street. 3) ______ ________ (有) a post office near here? 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 （4）当堂训练。 . Listening: T: Now let’s listen to the tape, and circle the places you hear in 1a. (听力指导：做好听力题的两个关键：一是听前看图片或者文字材料；二是 听时抓住关键词。) Listen again: finish the following dialogues: Conversation 1: A: Is there a restaurant _______ on Bridge Street? B: Yes, _________ ________. Conversation 2: A: _______ there a post office ________ here? B: Um, Yes, there ______. ___________ one on Long Street. Conversation 3: A: Is there a ______________ on Center Street? B: No, __________ _______. . Listening: 1. Work on 2a; T: Now, look at 2b, listen and fill in the blanks with the words in the box. The students check the answers. 2. Check the answers: Pair work 1. Ask the Ss to ask and answer questions about the places in 1a on page 43. 3、第三次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 能掌握以下句型： 1. ① —Is there a hospital near here? —Yes, there is. ② The pay phone is across from the library. ③ The pay phone is between the post office and the library. 2) 能了解以下语法： —— Where 引导的特殊疑问句及其答语。 ——学会 There is / are…。Is/are there..的句型及用法。 （4）当堂训练。 Role-play 1. Ask Ss to look at the conversations in 2d. Then Ss read the conversations by themselves and try to find out difficulties and suspicious. 2. T: 1. across from 意为“在……对面” e.g. The bank is across from our school. 银行就在我们学校对面。 【拓展】 across 作介词，意为“从一边到另一边；横过”。 e.g. Can you swim across the river? 你能游过这条河吗？ 2. in front of 意为“在……前面”（在某范 围之外） e.g. There is a car in front of the house. 在房子前一辆小汽车。 【辨析】in the front of “在……前面”（在 某范围之内） e.g. There is a table in the front of the classroom. 在教室的前面有一张桌子。 3. next to 意为“紧靠着；紧挨着；贴近” e.g. The little boy is next to his mother. 小男孩紧挨着他的母亲。 【辨析】next to 与 near 的区别 从空间讲 near 只表示“在……附近”；而 next to 有“紧挨着”之意；next to 比 near 靠的更近。 如：Peter sits next to Mike. 彼特紧挨着迈克坐。 Peter sits near Tom. 彼特坐在汤姆附近。 4. How can I help you? 需要我帮忙吗？ 表示向他人伸出援手，主动提出帮助的意思，此句还可说成：How can I help you?或 How may I help you? 类似的句子还有： May I help you? Do you need any help? Is there anything I can help (you) with? What can I do for you? Homework: 1. Write down the new words in this class. 2. 用今天所的学介词（near, next to, in front of, behind, between…and） 来写五个句子，描述一下你生活中常见的单位的位置。 板书设计： 课后反思： Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 一、出示课题：Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 二 、第一次先学后教.（ Grammar Focus.） 1、出示学习指导。 1) 能掌握以下单词：north 2) 继续练习 there be 句型的一般疑问句及其肯定与否定回答，学习以 where 引导的特殊疑问句的构成，能掌握以下句型： ①Is there a bank near here? Yes, there is. It’s on Center Street. ②Are there any restaurants near here? Yes, there’s one in front of the post office. ③Where’s the hotel? It’s behind the police station. ④ Where’s the bank? It’s next to the post office. ⑤ Where’s the park? It’s across from the bank, behind the hotel. ⑥Where are the pay phones? They’re between the post office and the library. 2、先学。 让学生自己先读语法焦点，并找出语法结构。 以学案的方式呈现在大屏幕上，让学生自主学习，并发现其用法。 Section A (1a-2d) Sentences： 1. —Is there a hospital near here? —Yes, there is . 2. The pay phone is across from the library. 3. The pay phone is between the post office and the library. 4. It’s not too far from here. 5. I can walk with you. With ----preposition 3、后教。 （1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （2）教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区分 语法结构上的变化。 4、当堂训练 .Grammar focus and revision 1. Review the grammar box. Ask students to say the questions and answers. Ask students to circle these words in the grammar focus section of their books: such as: on, across from, next to, between…..and. 2. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。 ① 附近有银行吗？_____________________ 是的。它在中心街上。 _________________________________ ② 附近有餐馆吗？ _________________________________ 有，在邮局前面有一家。 ________________________________ ③ 旅馆在哪里? ___________________ 它在公安局后面。______________________ 3. Ss check the answer with their partners. 4. Give Ss six more minutes to try to remember the sentences. T: Wonderful, now please look at 3a. 3. 探究学习 there be 句型 ⑴ There be ...句型表示的是“某处有(存在) 某人或某物”，其句式结构： 1. There be (is，are) +名词+地点状语 否定句：There isn’t / aren’t… 一般疑问句：Is/ Are + 主语 +…? 肯定回答：Yes, there is/are. 否定回答：No, there isn’t/aren’t. ⑵ There be 句型中的主谓一致原则 There be 句型中 be 动词的形式要和其后面的主语在人称和数上保持一致。 如果句子的主语是单数的可数名词，或是不可数名词，be 动词用“is”。 如果句子的主语是复数名词，be 动词就用“are”。 如果有两个或两个以上的名词作主语，be 动词要和最靠近它的那个主语 在数上保持一致，也就是我们常说的“就近原则”。 三、第二次先学后教.（补充句子） 1、出示学习指导。 能够独立完成填空题 3a-3b。 2、先学。 1、让学生独立完成 Write questions and answer with the words and phrase.提醒学 生 but 的用法。 2、根据单词提示选单词，补充完整句子。 3、后教。 1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （3） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区分语 法结构上的变化。 （4） 教师讲解 but 的用法和 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练。 Ⅲ. Practice: Look at 3a, pay attention to the questions in the box. Ask students to read it out loud. Look at the map and answer the questions. 1. Where is the bank? _____________________________________ 2. Is there a restaurant on North Street? _____________________________________ 3. Where’s the pay phone? _____________________________________ 4. Where’s the post office? _____________________________________ 5. Is there a hospital near the pay phone? ______________________________________ Learn by heart the following phrases, write them down on the book. 1）in the neighborhood 在附近地区 2）go straight 直走 3）turn left 向左转 4）turn right 向右转 5）on the left 在左边 6）on the right 在右边 ．Practice: Look at 3b. Ask the students to pay attention to the picture of 3a and write three sentences. 完成下列句子。 1. 火车站在公园对面。 __________________________________ 2. 餐馆紧挨着邮局。 __________________________________ 3. 在银行前有一个投币电话。 ______________________________________ 4. 在医院后面有一个公园。 _________________________________ 5. 在公安局附近有一个超市吗？ ______________________________________ Homework: 1. Remember the sentences in the Grammar Focus. 2. 用所学的介词描述在你所在地周围这些场所的位置。 post office, police station, school, bus station 板书设计 Section B 1a-2c 一、出示新课题：Section B 1a-2c 二、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 能掌握以下单词：（能做到四会）spend, spend time, climb, road, often, air, sunshine, free, enjoy, enjoy reading, easily, money （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 . Learn the new words T: Please look at the new words; let’s find out whose pronunciation is the best in my class. Ask the students to try to pronounce one by one, then the teacher correct it. Practice Look at 1a. The teacher asks the Ss who could put the three phrases into English, then let the Ss match the words in the box with the signs, and see who does the best and most quickly. 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 2）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 Section A Grammar Focus-3c ①Is there a bank near here? Yes, there is. It’s on Center Street. ②Are there any restaurants near here? Yes, there’s one in front of the post office. ③Where’s the hotel? It’s behind the police station. ④ Where are the pay phones? They’re between the post office and the library. 2、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 3、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点 拔解决。 （4）当堂训练。 Listening Look at 1a and 1b. 1. T asks the Ss to listen and write the correct place for each letter in the picture. 2. Listen again. Fill in the blanks. Check the answers. Group work Look at the picture of 1b. 1. Divide the Ss into groups. Each group has two students. 2. T: Now please imagine you and your partner are the two people in the picture in 1b. Ask and answer questions about the places. Explanation: Look at 2a and 2b. 1. The teacher asks the Ss to check the places near your home. Tell your partner where they are. 2. The teacher asks the Ss to find out difficulties. 3. Explanation: a). in my neighborhood 在我家附近 b). I like to spend time there on weekends. 我喜欢周末在那里度过时光。（提 示：spend 后跟动词的 ing 形式） c) I love to watch the monkeys climbing around. 我喜欢观看猴子们在周围爬树。 观看某人正在做某事 watch somebody doing d) To get there, I usually walk out and turn right on Bridge Road. 为了到达那里，我 通常走出去在 Bridge Road 向右拐。 To get there 在本句中为目的状语。 f) You can get to the library easily. 你可以容易地到达图书馆。 Easily 是副词，在这里修饰动词 get. 3. Ask the Ss to read aloud the passage, and learn the important sentences by heart. 3、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2）画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 3）了解课文内容，回答老师提出的课文相关联的问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 2) 能掌握以下句型： ① I like to spend time there on weekends. ② I love to watch the monkeys climbing around. ③ It is very quiet and I enjoy reading there. ④ You can get to the library easily. ⑤ The best things do not need money （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目 .Reading 1. Fast Reading: Read the passages and match each passage with a map. Ss read and match. Then check the answers. 2. Careful Reading Work on 2c: The teacher asks the Ss read passages again and answer the questions. Ss read the passage and try to answer the questions. Check the answers with the class. Choose the best student’s answer, and then read them in class. Homework 1. Write down the new words and sentences. 2. Write a composition about your family address and buildings around 板书设计： Section B 3a-Self Check 1、出示课题：Section B 3a-Self Check 2. 第一次“先学后教”。（ 特殊疑问句） （一）出示学习指导 1) 复习方位词及词组的表达方式。 2) 熟练掌握如下特殊疑问句： ① Where do you live? ② What is your favorite place in your neighborhood? Why? ③ How do you get there from your home? （二）先学。 （1）根据单词提示学生独立完成填空题。 （2）比较难的题学生之间或者小组之间进行讨论完成任务。 （三）后教。 （！）教师公布答案，学生之间相互改作业。并且大家总结哪些题做得好而那些 题做得好。 （2） 师加强对做错题型的讲解及训练。 （四）当堂训练。 Ⅱ. Presentation Look at 3a. Ask the Ss look at the map of Cindy’s neighborhood and fill in the blanks. Then check the answers. Ⅲ. Writing Section B 1a-2c a). in my neighborhood 在我家附近 b). I like to spend time there on weekends. 我喜欢周末在那里度过时光。 （提示：spend 后跟动词的 ing 形式） c) I love to watch the monkeys climbing around. 我喜欢观看猴子们在周 围爬树。 观看某人正在做某事 watch somebody doing d) To get there, I usually walk out and turn right on Bridge Road. 为了到达 那里，我通常走出去在 Bridge Road 向右拐。 To get there 在本句中为目的状语。 f) You can get to the library easily. 你可以容易地到达图书馆。 Easily 是副词，在这里修饰动词 get. Look at 3b, ask the Ss to draw a map of your neighborhood and write about it with the help of the following sentences. After writing it, correct the answers in groups, choose the most excellent answers to read in class at last. ① Where do you live? ② What is your favorite place in your neighborhood? Why? ③ How do you get there from your home? Ⅳ. Self Check 1 1. Have a competition: Look at Self Check 1. See who will finish the passage with the words in the box at first. Correct the answers: free, enjoy, climbing, spend. 2. Ask the Ss to find out difficulties in the passage, and then the teacher explains them. a) My grandma makes the foods I like. 我奶奶做我喜欢吃的食物。本句中的 I like 为后置定语从句，修饰先行词 foods, 此句只要求学生理解即可。 b) We sometimes watch the neighbor’s cats climbing the trees. 观看某人正在做某事，watch somebody doing something 观看某人做事的全过 程应为 watch somebody do something Ⅴ. Self Check 2 Tell the Ss to write five sentences about your school using “there is /are, there are some trees in my school.” Then check and correct them in groups. 2、第二次“先学后教”（补充句子，写短文） （一）出示学习指导。 1、根据例题完成填空题 2、完成 3a 部分，组织语言把它写成短文。 （二）先学。 （1）先让学生独立完成 Self Check。 （三）后教。 （1）教师公布答案,看谁做的最好，并且让做得好的学生总结一下自己是怎么做 的这些题，或者说说自己的学习方法，帮助后进生，做到相互学习的好习惯 (2)写作格式及要求。 （4）、当堂训练 Ⅵ. Writing: Imagine you are one of the two people in the picture on page 46. You have to tell others how to get to the supermarket of library, please write a composition. Homework 1. Review the new words and sentences of this unit. 2. Make a conversation to introduce your favorite places. 板书设计： 课后反思： Unit 9 What does he look like？ Section A (1a-2d) 1.板书课题：Unit 9 What does he look like？ Section A (1a-2d) 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 能掌握以下单词： （能做到四会） curly, straight, tall, medium, thin, heavy, build, tonight, little, cinema, glasses, later （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 Section B 3a-Self Check ① Where do you live? ② What is your favorite place in your neighborhood? Why? ③ How do you get there from your home? ④My grandma makes the foods I like. 我奶奶做我喜欢吃的食物。本句 中的 I like 为后置定语从句，修饰先行词 foods, 此句只要求学生理解即 可。 ⑤We sometimes watch the neighbor’s cats climbing the trees. 观看某人正在做某事，watch somebody doing something 观看某人做事 的全过程应为 watch somebody do something 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 . Presentation (Section A 1a) 1. Match the words with the people in the picture. (1a) 学习课本的第一部分P49,1a先看图片，然后搭配图片和相关的外貌特征的词。 Now please look at P49, Use the letters to match the people in the picture with one of the numbered words. Write each letter next to a numbered word. You can use some letters more than once. Point out the sample answer. (Keys: c, f, a, a, d, h, e, b, g, e) 留 2-3 分钟读写 1a 中的单词、短语。 2. 引导学生熟悉有关描述人的外貌特征的词 (1). 用漫画画人物教有关 height，curly 等单词。然后操练“What does he look like? He is really tall.” 注意 be 动词的用法。 (2). 一个 cartoon girl 教身体的各部位（ear, face, hair, eye, nose, mouth）。然 后操练“What does he look like? He has long straight hair.” 注意 has 的用法。 (3). pictures 来教有关头发的词汇, 注意 has 的用法。接着教 a beard, a moustache, glasses。 . Practice (Section A 1c) 1. Read the conversation and recite it. 2. Practice like the conversation according to some pictures. 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 Listening (1b, 2a & 2b) 1. Look at the picture of 1a, listen and fill the blanks in the picture. (1b) Listen carefully and fill in the blanks and find Amy’s friend? We will listen twice．The first time, just listen．The second time，listen and fill in the blanks．And say the look of Amy’s friend．( He's really tall．And he has curly hair.) 2. Listen and answer the questions. (2a) 3. Listen again and fill in the chart. (2b) David Sally Peter is has 4. Listen a third time to understand the key words. . Practice (2c) 1. Student A looks at the chart in 2b. Student B asks Student A questions about one of the people and then draws a picture of the person quickly. 2. Act the dialogue. 第三次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 能掌握以下句型： —What does he look like? —He’s of medium/build. —What does he look like? —She has long straight hair. —Is he tall or short？ Role-play the conversation. (2d) 1. Read the conversation to answer the questions： （1）When are they meeting? （2）Where are they meeting? （3）What does David look like? (4) Is he tall or short? 2. Read the conversation. 3. Role-play the conversation. 4. Explanation: (1) may be (2) a little Homework 1. 熟记本节课所学单词，预习 P51& P52。 2．Describe your friends in the class and draw a picture of them. 板书设计： 课后反思： Section A (Grammar Focus-1d) （一）出示课题：Section A (Grammar Focus-1d) 第一次先学后教.（ Grammar Focus.） （二）、示学习指导。 1）掌握单词：（能做到四会） handsome, actor, actress, person, nose 2）能掌握以下句型： ① He’s of medium/build. ② What does he look like? He’s really tall. ③ What does he look like? She has long straight hair. ④ Is he tall or short？ 3、后教。 (1)教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 (2)教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区分语法 Section A (1a-2d) Words & expressions Drills： curly, straight, tall, medium, What does he look like? He’s really tall. thin, heavy, build, tonight, She has long straight hair. little, cinema, glasses, later He’s of medium/build. 结构上的变化。 4、当堂训练。 . Grammar Focus 1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，并完成下列句子填空练习。 2. 指导。注意提醒、区分单复数，is 与 has。 ① 他长的什么样子？_____________________ 他个子很高。 _______________________ ② 她长的什么样子？ ___________________ 她长着长的直发。 ____________________ ③ 他们长的什么样子？___________________ 他们中等身材。 ___________________ ④ 他们长着直发还是卷发？__________________ 他们长着卷发。______________________ ⑤ 他个头是高还是矮？ ____________________ 他不高也不矮。他是中等身高。 _____________________________ Ss finish off the sentences and check the answers. 3. 自主探究 一、描述人物外貌的问句。 1. 她/他长得什么样子？ What does he/she ____ _______? 2. 他们长得什么样子？ What _____ they _____ ________? 3. 她个子是高还是矮？ ______ she tall ______ _______? 4. 他长着长发还是短发? _____ he have ______ hair _____ short hair? 二、描述人物形象的表达方式。 1. 描述身高、体重等整体特征时用 be 动词。如： 他很高/矮/中等身高。 He _____ tall/ _____/ ____ _______ height. 她长得很瘦/胖/中等身材。 She ____ thin/ _____/ of _______ ______. 2. 表示留着何种发型等用 have/has。 她留着长的直发。 She ______ _________ long hair. 3. 表示穿着、戴着眼镜（帽子）用 wear。 他戴着一幅眼镜。 He _____ a pair of _______. . Reading (Work on 3b) Read the sentences and circle the correct words to complete the conversation. 1. 阅读指导：首先，应读每个句子，理解句子的意思；然后，应根据主语的 单复数形式来确定谓语动词或助动词的单复数形式。之后，还要看动词后面是形 容词还是名词，这样来确定是用 is 还是 has/have; 最后，通读一遍本句子，看是 否通顺。 2. Ss read the sentences and chose the correct words quickly. 3. Check the answers. （二）、第二次先学后教.（补充句子） 1、出示学习指导。 能够独立完成填空题 3a-3b。 2、先学。 1、让学生独立完成 Write questions and answer with the words and phrase.提醒学 生 but 的用法。 2、根据单词提示选单词，补充完整句子。 3、后教。 1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （5） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区分语 法结构上的变化。 （6） 教师讲解 but 的用法和 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练。 . Writing 1. Show some photos of the famous singer or actor (actress) Ask Ss: Who is your favorite singer/actor/actress? Ss think and answer this question. 2. Then ask them these two questions: What does your favorite actor or actress look like? 3. Ss think and answer: 4. Now write down your answers on the line. 5. Work in groups. Talk about your favorite teacher/friend … What does she/he look like? Think and write down your sentences. Practice 学生分小组谈论自己感兴趣的名人长相，后填写下表 name is has likes Pan Changjiang short round face telling jokes 帮助学生具体问答，板书 thin，blonde, good-looking，basketball team，straight hair． Homework 1. 熟记本节课所学单词，预习 P53。 2．Describe your family members and draw a picture of them. 板书设计： 课后反思： Section B 1a-2c 1、出示课题：Section B 1a-2c 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 1) 能掌握以下单词：blonde, mouth, round, face, eye, singer, artist, crime, criminal, put, each, way, describe, differently, another, end, real 2) 能掌握描述人物相貌的句型。 （2）、先学。 Words & expressions Drills： is: What does your friend Mark look like? heavy, thin Well, he is thin, and he has black hair of medium build Really? Is he tall or short? tall, short He isn't tall or short. He is of medium build. of medium height Does he has curly or straight hair? has: He has straight hair. And he is really handsome. short hair, curly hair straight hair, long hair 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 Ⅱ. Presentation 1. Write the words describing the people as many as possible, e.g. tall, thin, … black hair, round face … (Show some pictures on the big screen, and present the new words and expressions in this period) (blonde, mouth, round, face, eye, singer, artist, crime, criminal …) 2. Work on 1a: Match the words with the pictures. 3. Read and write these words about 2 minutes. Ⅲ. Writing 1. Read the phrases in the box in 1b and make sentences about famous people with the words. e.g. Zhao Benshan has a long face. 2. Fill in the blanks and check each other. 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 2）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 2、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 3、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点 拔解决。 （4）当堂训练。 . Listening Work on 1c: You will hear Maria and Danny talking about Tina Brown and Johnny Dean. 1. Your job is to write the job each person does. Point to the heading "Job" on the chart. Listen again and check the answers. 2. This time your job is to write what each person looks like. Point to the heading "looks like". Check the answers. Johnny Dean Tina Brown Job singer actress Looks like really tall and thin has curly hair funny glasses medium height has long blonde hair beautiful 3. Listen a third time to understand the key words. . Practice 1. Complete the chart with the words of the opposite meaning. young thin tall long curly 2. Ss discuss with their partners, then check the answers. . Thinking about what you will look like in 20 years. 1. Write what you look like now. I’m … I have … 2. 设计一下自己的新形象。 I’m … I have … 3、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2）画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 3）了解课文内容，回答老师提出的课文相关联的问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 Reading & writing（2b & 2c） 1. Look at the pictures of 2b and say what the three people look like. 2. Fast reading: Read the article and find the real criminal. 3. Careful reading: Read the article again and find the words describing what the three people look like in the article. Let some Ss read out the sentences. Work on 2c: 1. Read the article again and write what the words in bold refer to. 1）He = 2）it = 3）him = 2. 阅读指导：（见课件） 3. Read the article to find the language points and try to translate into Chinese. 4. Explaining the language points: 1) talk to 2) in the end Homework 1. Read the article of 2b. 2. Write your new look and draw on a piece of paper. 板书设计： Section B 3a-Self –Check Words & expressions Drills： rocker singer; tall, thin, long curly hair, glasses movie actor; medium height, long blonde hair 2a: old, heavy/fat; short, short; straight 2c: Joe Brown; a picture of the criminal; the criminal draw a good picture of each criminal; many people 课后反思： 2、第一次“先学后教”。（补充句子） （一）出示学习指导 1、根据单词提示完成填空题。 1）单词：复习整个单元。 2）句型：复习整个单元。 （二）先学。 （1）根据单词提示学生独立完成填空题。 （2）比较难的题学生之间或者小组之间进行讨论完成任务。 （三）后教。 （！）教师公布答案，学生之间相互改作业。并且大家总结哪些题做得好而那些 题做得好。 （2）师加强对做错题型的讲解及训练。 （四）当堂训练 2. Write more words in each box. (Self Check 1). To find who writes most right words. 3. Read and write these words about 3 minutes. Ⅲ. Fill the blanks with the words in the box. (3a) 1. Look at the picture of 3a to say what Jack looks like. 2. Fill in the blanks quickly. 3. Check the answers. 4. Read the passage and translate into Chinese. 5. Language points 1) first of all 2) be good at 3、第二次“先学后教”（补充句子，写短文文） （一）出示学习指导。 1、根据例题完成填空题 2、完成 3a 部分，组织语言把它写成短文。 （二）先学。 （1）先让学生独立完成 Self Check。 （三）后教。 （1）教师公布答案,看谁做的最好，并且让做得好的学生总结一下自己是怎么做 的这些题，或者说说自己的学习方法，帮助后进生，做到相互学习的好习惯 (2)写作格式及要求。 （4）、当堂训练 . Writing (3b) 1. Read the questions in the form of 3b. 2. 写作指导：（见课件） 3. Write a passage about your best friend. 4. Check the passages each other to correct them in the group. 4. Read the best passage for the class. . Self Check 2 1. What do you parents look like? Describe them like this: My dad is tall. He has … He wears … He likes … My mum is … She has … She wears … She likes … 2. Check the passages each other to correct them in the group. 3. Read the best passage for the class. Homework 1. To master the words and expressions of this unit. 2. To master the sentences of Grammar Focus. 板书设计： 课后反思： Section B 3a-Self Check 3a: looks; thin, straight, glasses, shoes 3b: His name is Li Fan. She likes to wear jeans and white T-shirt. She has long hair big nose. Because she is funny and interesting. Self check 1: tall, short, of medium height; thin, heavy, of medium build; curly, short, long, black, blonde; glasses, T-shirt, sports shoes, jeans. Unit 10 I’d like some noodles. 1、板书课题：Unit 10 I’d like some noodles. Section A (1a-2d) 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 1) 能掌握以下单词：（能做到四会） noodles, mutton, beef, cabbage, potato, special, would, would like, order, bowl, size, tofu （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 . Presentation 1. (show some pictures of food on the big screen) Present some new words and expressions to the Ss. 2. Ss learn the new words and expressions by themselves and try to remember them. 3. Work on 1a: Read the words on the left and look at the pictures on the right. Write the letters of the food on the line. Then check the answers. 3、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 3)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 . Listening T: In the following conversation, one man is ordering some food. Now, let’s listen to the tape, find out the right noodles the person orders. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and check the answers. Pair work 1. Present the conversation in 1b on the big screen and ask Ss to practice it. 2. Make their own conversations using the noodles in the picture. 3. Let some pairs act out their conversations. . Listening 1. Work on 2a; T: Now, look at the pictures on the right, listen to the conversations and check the names of the foods you hear. (Play the recording for the first time, students only listen carefully. Then, listen to the recording again, and check the names of the foods. Check the answers. ) 2. Work on 2b: (Play the recording for the Ss to listen and complete the sentences.) Play the recording twice. The first time Ss just listen. And the second time, Ss listen and write down the words. (If necessary, use the pause button to help Ss) 3. Check the answers. Pair work 1. Ask and answer questions with your partner. Use the information in 2a. 2. Show the conversations of 2a on the big screen to the Ss. 3. Make a model for the Ss. T: What kind of noodles would you like? S1: I'd like beef noodles, please. …Ss work in pairs and practice the conversations. 4、第三次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 能掌握以下句型： ① —What would you like? ② —I'm not sure yet. Are there any vegetables in the beef noodles? ③ May I take your order? ④ —Can we have two bowls of beef soup then? —Sure. What size would you like? —Medium, please. (2)、先学。 1）、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2）、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1）、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、 差） 2）、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3）、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 4) 能了解以下语法：情态动词 would 的用法； 5）能掌握订餐或叫外卖等的用语 Role-play 1. Ask Ss to read the conversation in 2d and find the answer to this question： What would they like? (They would like one large bowl of beef soup, one gongbao chicken, and one mapo tofu with rice.) 2. Check the answers with the Ss. 3. Ss work with their partners and role-play the conversation. . Language points . Exercises Homework 1. Review the words and expressions in this period. 2. Role-play the conversation in 2d. 3. Write a short conversation to order some noodles you like in a restaurant. 板书设计： Section A (1a-2d) Drills： ① —What would you like? ② — I'm not sure yet. Are there any vegetables in the beef noodles? ③ May I take your order? ④ —Can we have two bowls of beef soup then? —Sure. What size would you like? —Medium, please. 课后反思： Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 1、 出示课题： 2、第一次先学后教.（ Grammar Focus.） （1）、出示学习指导。 1) 继续练习运用如何订餐或叫外卖等的用语。 2) 根据所提供的材料能运用所学的知识来补全对话。 3) 总结复习订餐时所用句型结构。 （2）、先学。 （7） 让学生自己先读语法焦点，并找出语法结构。 老师将情态动词的 can 的用法，以学案的方式呈现在大屏幕上，让学生自主学习， 并发现其用法。 （3）、后教。 （1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （2）、教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区分语 法结构上的变化。 （3） 教师讲解 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练 Ⅰ. Grammar Focus. 1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子，然后做填空练习。 ① 你想要什么面条？ ______________________________________ 请给我来牛肉面。________________________ ② 你想要什么碗的？_______________________ 请给我来中碗的。 ________________________________ ③ 你想来一个大碗吗? ____________________________________ 好的。______________________ ④ 在西红柿鸡蛋汤里有肉吗? _______________________________ 不，没有。_______________________ ⑥ I’d = ____________ ⑦ She’d = _________ ⑧ 不可数名词有：bread, milk, water, _____________________________ ⑨ 既 是 可 数 又 是 不 可 数 的 名 词 ： salad, chicken, ice cream, ______________ 2. Ss finish off the sentences and check the answers by themselves. 3. 自主探究 一、would like 意为 “想要某物”，常用句式结构： 1. 你想要点什么？ What ______ you ______? 我想要一杯茶。 ____ _____ a cup of tea. 你想要什么面条？ What ____ of noodles _____ you like? 你想要多大号的毛衣？ What ____ of sweater ______ you like? （以上句型为有礼貌、委婉地表达征求对方的要求） 2. Would you like …? 你想要……吗？这也是用来向对方有礼貌地语气委婉 地 征求对方要求的句型。其答语为： Yes, please. /OK. /No, thanks. 你想要一些牛奶吗？ ______ you _____ some milk? 是的，谢谢。/ 不，谢谢。 Yes, _______. / No, _______. 【拓展】Would you like to do sth.? 你愿意做某事吗？ 用来有礼貌地向对方提出建议或邀请的句型。答语常为“Yes, I’d like to.” “Sorry, …” 二、可数名词与不可数名词 1. 可数名词：可数名词有单数、复数之分。其复数形式一般要加-s 或-es。 如： potato—_______; tomato—__________ 2. 不可数名词没有复数形式，只有单数形式。如： some ______ (米饭)；a lot of _____ (牛肉) (1) 不可数名词表示数量的多少时，必须与表示数量的名词连用，即“数词+ 表示数量的名词（可数名词）+ of + 不可数名词”，如： 两玻璃杯果汁 三碗米饭 _____ ______ of juice _____ ______ of rice (2) 不可数名词做主语时，谓语动词只能用单数形式。例如： 在碗里有一些羊肉汤。 There _____ _____ mutton soup in the bowl. （二）、第二次先学后教.（补充句子） 1、出示学习指导。 1)能够独立完成填空题 3a-3b。 2) 总结订餐所用语言及句子结构。 3) 学习理解情态动词 would 的用法。 3) 通用所学的知识在实际情境中订餐 2、先学。 1、让学生独立完成 Write questions and answer with the words and phrase.提醒学 生 but 的用法。 2、根据单词提示选单词，补充完整句子。 3、后教。 1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （4） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区分 语法结构上的变化。 （5） 教师讲解 but 的用法和 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练。 【拓展】如果不可数名词前有复数名词短语修饰时，谓语动词须用复数形式。 如： 房间里有两袋子大米。 ______ ______two bags of rice in the room. Practice 1. Work on 3a. Tell Ss to complete the conversation with sentences on the right. 2. Ss work by themselves and complete the conversation. 3. Check the answers with the Ss. 4. Let Ss practice the conversations in pairs. Practice 1. Work on 3b. Tell Ss to write questions and answers using the words in the brackets. Give a model to the Ss. What kind of noodles would you like? 2. 指导：看提示词，确定句子是对什么事情提问，检查句子的语序是否正确。 最后，再根据自己的实际情况回答些问题。 3. Practice the conversation with your partners. Homework 1. Remember the sentences in Grammar Focus. 2. Make some conversations to ask your friends what food they would like. Write a short conversation. 板书设计 Section A Grammar Focus-3c 缩写: I'd = I would she'd = she would 不可数名词：肉类，饮料类 可数又不可数名词： chicken, salad, ice-cream, cabbage （探究它们 做可数名词时及不可数名词时的意思） 3a: 1. D 2. A 3. F 4. C 5. E 6. B 3c: S1: Anna. What would you like to eat? S2: I'd like beef noodles with cabbage. 课后反思： Section B 1a-2c 1、出示课题：Section B 1a-2c 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 能掌握以下单词：（能做到四会） world, answer, different, cake, candle, age, blow, blow out, if, will, UK, candy, lucky, popular, cut up idea （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练 .. Presentation 1. (show some pictures of food on the big screen) Present some new words and expressions to the Ss. 2. Ss learn the new words and expressions by themselves and try to remember them. 3. Work on 1a: Read the words in the chart and look at the pictures below. Write the letters of the foods or drinks on the line. Then check the answers. 4. Let Ss try to remember the new words and expressions. Ⅲ. Pairwork 1. Circle the things you like in 1a. Put an х next to the things you don’t like Then tell you partner what you like and don't like. Sa: I like dumplings, but I don't like noodles. Sb: Well, I like fish but I don't like meat. 2. Work in groups. Talk about what you like and what you don’t like. 3. Make a list of things every one likes and dislikes in your group. Then give a report to your classmates: In our group, Sa likes dumplings but she doesn't like noodles. Sb likes fish but she doesn't like meat. … 4. Let some Ss give their report. 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 2）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 2、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 3、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点 拔解决。 （4）当堂训练。 . Listening Work on 1c: 1. Ask Ss to read the ORDER FORM carefully. 2. Play the tape for the Ss to listen and complete the food order form. (Play the recording for the first time, students only listen carefully. Then, listen to the recording again, and write down the names of the foods. ) Work on 1d: Listen again. Use the pause button to check the answers with the Ss. S2: My parents usually buy me some nice books and school things on my birthday. S3: …. 3. Write down what your group members do on their birthday. And give a report to the class. In my group, S1… S2… S3… 3、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单 词、短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2）画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 3）了解课文内容，回答老师提出的课文相关联的问题。 （2）、先学。 1）、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2）、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1）、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2）、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3）、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 2) 能掌握以下句型： ① The answer would be different in different countries. ② The number of candles is the person's age. ③ In China, it's getting popular （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 . Reading 1. Fast reading True or False 2. Careful reading Read the passage complete the chart below. 阅读指导： 首先，读表格，记住这四空格，分别是在美国及中国人们在过生日时所吃 的食物及他们的特殊含义。其次，带着问题去仔细读短文，并在短文中寻 找相关问题的回答依据。然后，根据相关依据，将答案写在空格处。 3. Read the messages again. Find the answers to the questions in 2c. 阅读指导：首先，读这四个问题，记住这四个问题。其次，带着问题去仔 细读短文，并在短文中寻找相关问题的回答依据。然后，根据相关依据， 写出问题的答案。 Check the answers with the Ss. Homework 1. Remember the new words and expressions in this period. 2. 用下列词汇造句： 1) around the world 2) in different countries 3) the number of 4) blow out 5) in one go 6) come true 7) get popular 8) cut up 板书设计： 课后反思： Section B 3a-Self Check 一 出示课题：Section B 3a-Self Check 二、第一次“先学后教”。（补充句子） （一）出示学习指导 1）根据单词提示完成填空题。 2) 继续练习运用如何订餐或叫外卖等的用语。 3) 根据所提供的材料能运用所学的知识来补全对话。 4) 总结复习订餐时所用句型结构。 （二）先学。 （1）根据单词提示学生独立完成填空题。 （2）比较难的题学生之间或者小组之间进行讨论完成任务。 Section B 1a-2c 1a: 1.b 2. a 3, e 4. h 5. c 6. e 7. b 8. d 9. f 1b: I like dumplings, fish and orange juice. I don't like onions, green tea or porridge. 2b: birthday cake, the wish will come true long noodles, eggs, a symbol of long life; symbol of life and good luck （三）后教。 （！）教师公布答案，学生之间相互改作业。并且大家总结哪些题做得好而那 些题做得好。 （2） 师加强对做错题型的讲解及训练。 （3） 做练习。 （四）当堂训练 1、 Writing 1. Read the ads in 3a. Fill in the blanks with the words in the box. 阅读指导：首先，明白方框里单词的意思； 其次，阅读这个小广告，了解其大意； 然后，认真读每一个句子，根据上下文及空格前后的关键词来确定空 格处的意思。并确定应用哪个单词填空。 最后，再通读一遍广告内容，看短文是否通顺恰当。 2. 学生们按老师所指导的方法，认真阅读短文，并用正确的单词填空。 3. Check the answers. 2、 Writing 1. Make sure the Ss know what to do. (Imagine you have a special restaurant, write the foods and prices.) 2. Ss work by themselves and try to write the foods and prices. 3. 指导：可先列出食物名称，然后，再写出价格。最后，再用英语写出来。 e.g. burgers: 3$ soup: 1$ We have nice burgers for three dollars. The soup is only one dollar. 4. Let some Ss read out their sentences. 2、第二次“先学后教”（补充句子，写短文） （一）出示学习指导。 1、根据例题完成填空题 2、完成 3a 部分，组织语言把它写成作文。 （二）先学。 （1）先让学生独立完成 Self Check。 （三）后教。 （1）教师公布答案,看谁做的最好，并且让做得好的学生总结一下自己是怎么做 的这些题，或者说说自己的学习方法，帮助后进生，做到相互学习的好习惯 (2)写作格式及要求。 （4）、当堂训练 Writing 1. Write an ad for you restaurant. These sentences structures may help you. 2. Let Ss read the sentences first, and try to remember them. 3. Let Ss make a list of the food and drinks in your restaurant. 4. Use the sentences structures and write the ad. 5. Let some Ss read out their ad. Show some good ad on the big screen as a model. . Self Check 1 1. Make sure Ss know what to do. Put the words you learned in different groups. 2. Check the answers. . Self Check 2 1. Tell Ss they'll read some interesting jokes. Read the jokes below and fill in the blanks with "there be" structure. 2. 指导：这里是考查 there be 句型中的主谓一致原则及近主语原则的知识。 3. Ss read the jokes and fill in the blanks. 4. Check the answers with the Ss. 5. Let Ss act out the joke for fun. . Making a conversation 1. If you are in a restaurant. What should the waiter say to you？What should you say to the waiter to order? Now look at the clues below and write a conversation. 2. Ss read the clues and try to write a conversation. 3. Check the answers with the Ss. 板书设计 课后反思： Section B 3a-Self Check 3a: specials, kinds, strawberry, bowl, order 3b: e.g. burgers: 3$ soup: 1$ We have nice burgers for three dollars. The soup is only one dollar. Self Check 2: 1. There is 2. There are 3. There isn't Making a conversation: May I take your order? Yes, please. Are there any vegetables in the soup? Yes, there are some carrots. What size of bowl would you like? I'd like the small one. Thank you. Unit 11 How was your school trip ? 1.板书课题：Unit 11 How was your school trip ? 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 基本词汇：（能做到四会） milk, cow, horse, feed, farmer, quite, anything, grow, farm, pick, excellent, coutryside, yesterday, flower, worry, luckily, sun, 基本词组：（能用词组举例） milk a cow, ride a horse, feed chickens, quite a lot (of…), in the countryside, fire （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 1、板书课题 Period 1 Step 2 : Presentation 1 Show a picture and tell Ss: This is also a farm. Last week Carol and his classmates had a school trip. They went to the farm. What did they do on the farm? How was their school trip? 2 Show some pictures again and try to get the past tense verbs expressions according to the pictures. (1) Show the picture and the question (2) Ask one student to answer the question. (3) All students read it toghter. Q:Did he ride a horse? A:Yes, he did. He rode a horse. Q:Did he milk a cow? A:Yes, he did. He milked a cow. Q:Did he ride a horse? A :No, he didn’t . Did he feed chickens? Yes, he did. He fed chickens. Did you go to the zoo? No, I didn’t. I went to a farm. Did you see any cows ? Yes, I did. I saw quite a lot. Did they pick any strawberries on the farm ? Yes, they did . How were the strawberries? They were delicious. Were the strawberries good? Yes, they were. No, they weren’t. How was your school trip ? It was great. Were the strawberries good ? Yes ,they were. No, they weren’t. 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （1）出示学习指导： 2）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 3）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 （2）、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 4、能运用一般过去时描写过去的事情 基本句型：How was your school trip ? It was great ! Did you go to the zoo ? No, I didn’t. I went to a farm. Did you see any cows ? Yes, I did. I saw quite a lot. Did Carol ride a horse ? No, she didn’t. But she milked a cow. Were the strawberries good ? Yes, they were . No, they weren’t. Step 4 : Practice (Listening and speaking) 1a Match the phrses with the pictures. 1b Listen and circle the three things Carol did on her school trip in 1a. 1c Ask and answer questions about Carol’s school trip. 2a Listen and check the questions you hear. 2b Listen again.Circle T for true or F for false 2c Ask and answer questions about Carol’s visit to the farm. Step 5 :Tasks: 1 Look at the pictures and practice the dialogue A:How was your school trip? B: It was …(boring/interesting/good/great…) A:What did you do on the school trip ? B:I went for a walk with my classmates. 2 2d Role-play the conversation 3.Groupwork: Make a survey. Ask your partners what they did last week. Then give a reporter. Step 6 : Grammar Focus ( Get Ss read aloud ) How was your school trip ? It was great ! Did you go to the zoo ? No, I didn’t. I went to a farm. Did you see any cows ? Yes, I did. I saw quite a lot. Did Carol ride a horse ? No, she didn’t. But she milked a cow. Were the strawberries good ? Yes, they were . No, they weren’t. Step 6 Summary and Language points Step 7 Exercises : 课后反思： Section A (Grammar Focus-3b) 一）、第一次先学后教.（ Grammar Focus.） 1、出示学习指导。 （1）能运用一般过去时描写过去的事情。 （2）能掌握 Grammar Focus 的内容。 2、先学。 （4） 让学生自己先读语法焦点，并找出语法结构。 老师将情态动词的 can 的用法，以学案的方式呈现在大屏幕上，让学生自主学习， 并发现其用法。 3、后教。 （1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （5） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比， 区分语法结构上的变化。 （6） 教师讲解 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练 Step 1：1 Greeting How are you today ? How were you yesteday ? How was your last school trip ? 2 Free talk : T : Do you want to know something about your classmates’ school trip ? Now Ask your partner :What did you do on your school trip ? Then fill in the following chart. （二）、第二次先学后教.（补充句子） 1、出示学习指导。 能够独立完成填空题 3a-3b。 2、先学。 1、让学生独立完成 Write questions and answer with the words and phrase.提醒学 生 but 的用法。 2、根据单词提示选单词，补充完整句子。 3、后教。 1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （7） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比， 区分语法结构上的变化。 （8） 教师讲解 but 的用法和 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变 化。 4、当堂训练。 Step 2 ：Pre-task : 1.Look at the pictures and fill in the blanks. 2.Write the past forms of the following verbs. 3. Check the past forms .Then ask Ss to summerize the rules of past forms of the regular verbs. Then explain the rules of past forms of the regular verbs Step 3 While-task 3a 1 Ask Ss to read the letters in 3a . 2 Ask Ss to complete Jim’s letter on the left and Bill’s reply on the right. 3 Check the answers .Ask Ss to pay attention to the past tenst verbs. 4 Explain the language points 5 Read the letters together. Step 4: Post-task 1. Challenge: Ask Ss to fill in the blanks according to the pictures. 2 Check the answers. Ask Ss to read the answers one by one. 3 Have a student read the letter out aloud. 4 Ask Ss to read the letter several times. Try to recite it. 5 Groupwork: Make up a story. Each student adds a sentence.If he or she can’t add a sentenec .He or she must sing an English song. You can begin like this: Last week I visited my aunt’s house. _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ Step 5 Language points and Exercises 课后反思： Section B (1a-2c) 1、出示课题：Period 3 Section B (1a-2c) 三、教学过程 1、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 掌握单词：（能做到四会） museum, fire, painting, exciting, lovely, expensive, cheap, slow, fast, robot, guide, gift, everything, interested, dark, hear。 （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 Period 3 Section B (1a-2c) Step 1：1 Greeting What did you do yesterday ? How were you yesterday ? 2 Review: Games Use your imagation and make up a story. Each student adds a sentence.If he or she can’t add a sentence,he or she must sing an English song. Step 2 ：Preparation 1a 1 Match the activities with the pictures. 2 Check the answers 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 2）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 2、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 3、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点 拔解决。 （4）当堂训练。 Step 2 ：Listening 1b 1c 1 Listen and answer the questions. 1 How was Jane’s trip ? 2 How was Tony’s trip ? 2 Check the answers. 3 Listen again. What did Jane and Tony do on their last school trip ? Check Tony or Jane. Step 3：Speaking 1d 1 What was your last school trip like ? Discuss it with your partner with the following words. 2 Teach Ss to read the following words : interesting difficult lovely slowexciting boring cool hot lucky large expensive terrible decilious great cheap fast 3 Discuss like following conversation. A: I went to a farm on my last school trip.There are many animals on the farm.They are very lovely. B: That sounds great. A: How was your school trip ? B: It was __________ A: How was the food there ? B: It was _____________ A: How was the weather ? B: It was ___________ Step 4: Prepatation 2a Do the following words describe good things or bad things ? Put a √for good and an ×for bad . Leave a blank if they can mean both. 3、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2）画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 3）了解课文内容，回答老师提出的课文相关联的问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 Step 5 : Reading 2b,2c 1 Read Helen’s and Jim’s diary entries and answer the questions in 2b 2 Read the diaries again and complete the chart in 2c How do Helen and Jim describe these things ? 3 Check the answers .Ask Ss to pay attention to the past tenst verbs. 4 Explain the language points 5 Read the passages aloud Step 6 : Language points and exercises. 课后反思： Section B (3a-Self check ) 1、出示课题 Period 4 Section B (3a-Self check ) 2、第一次“先学后教”。（补充句子） （一）出示学习指导 1、能用 How.引导的特殊疑问句回答问题。 2、根据单词提示完成填空题。 （二）先学。 （1）根据单词提示学生独立完成填空题。 （2）比较难的题学生之间或者小组之间进行讨论完成任务。 （三）后教。 （！）教师公布答案，学生之间相互改作业。并且大家总结哪些题做得好而那些 题做得好。 （9） 师加强对做错题型的讲解及训练。 （四）当堂训练 Step 1：1 Greeting How are you feeling today? What did you do last night? How was your homework yesterday? 2 Review : Games Use your imagnation and make up a story. Each student adds a sentence.If he or she can’t add a sentence,he or she must sing an English song. Step 2 : Preparation 1.3a Look at the pictures of Bob’s school trip.Complete his diary entry. 2. 3b Linda is Bob’s classmate. Complete her diary entry. 2、第二次“先学后教”（补充句子，写短文） （一）出示学习指导。 1、根据例题完成填空题 2、完成 3a 部分，组织语言把它写成短文。 （二）先学。 （1）先让学生独立完成 Self Check。 （三）后教。 （1）教师公布答案,看谁做的最好，并且让做得好的学生总结一下自己是怎么做 的这些题，或者说说自己的学习方法，帮助后进生，做到相互学习的好习惯 (2)写作格式及要求。 （4）、当堂训练 Step 2 : Writing 3c Now write a diary entry for your own school trip. Explain if you liked it or didn’t like it and why. Step 3 : Self-check 1 Write more verbs and their past forms in each group. 2 Complete the conversations with the correct forms of the verbs in the box. 3 Check the answers 4 Grammar: The Simple Past Tense 课后反思： Unit 12 What did you do last weekend? Section A（1a-2d） 1.板书课题：Section A 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 1)掌握以下单词：（能做到四会） camp, lake, beach, badminton, sheep, as, natural, butterfly, visitor, tired, stay, stay up late. .（2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 Ⅱ. 1 a This activity introduces the key vocabulary. Focus attention on the picture. Ask students to tell what they see. Name each activity and ask students to repeat: did my homework, went to the cinema, went boating, camped by the lake, went to the beach, played badminton. Point out the numbered list of activities. Say each one again and ask students to repeat. Then ask students to match each activity with one of the pictures. Say, Write the letter of each activity next to the words. Point out the sample answer. Check the answers. 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板。 1. Listening Work on 1b This activity gives students practice in understanding the target language in spoken conversation. Point to the activities in the picture in activity la. Ask students to tell what the person did in each picture. For example, She played badminton, or Lucy went to the cinema. Play the recording the first time. Students only listen. Play the recording a second time. This time say. Listen to the recording and write the days and times Lucy did each thing under the pictures. Point out the sample answer under the picture of Lucy playing badminton; on Saturday morning. Correct the answers. 2. Listening Work on 2a: This activity gives students practice in understanding the key vocabulary in spoken conversation. Point to the five sentences and ask a student to read these sentences to the class. Say, You will hear recording of a conversation. The people will talk about some of the activities and people, but they will not talk about others. Please underline the words you hear on the recording. Play the recording the first time. Students only listen. Play the recording a second time. This time, ask students to underline each word that is said on the tape. Point out the sample answer, grandmother. Correct the answers.1grandma 2 homework 3 English 4 farm 5 cows 3. Listening Work on 2b: This activity provides listening practice using the target language. Call attention to the pictures of Carol, Becky, and Jack and ask students to identify each person by name. Say, Now I will play the recording again. Listen to the students talking about what they did over the weekend. Write C for Carol, B for B Becky or J for Jack next to each statement in activity 2a. The first one has been done for you. Play the recording the first time. Students only listen. Point out the sample answer, S, in statement 1. Say, Sonia visited her grandmother. Play the recording again. Ask students to write a letter in front of each statement to show what each person did. Check the answers. B B C J J Ⅶ. Pair work Ask and answer in pairs. Point to the example conversation. Ask two students to read the dialogue to the class. Say, Now work with a partner. Student A, ask questions about what, who or where , Student B answers. Students work in pairs. 第三次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）、 用最快的速度大概的看看听力题，对题的内容有一点了解。 2）、仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 2、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌相互改，教师统计学生的自学结果。（分优、良、差） 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点拔解决，并 板书于黑板 4、掌握以下句型： ①—Where did you do last weekend, Lucy? —I went to summer camp. ② —How was your weekend? —Pretty good, thanks ③ —I worked as a guide at the Natural History Museum. ④ —How interesting! 5、能了解以下语法：learn to talk about recent past events 板书设计： —Where did you do last weekend, Lucy? —I went to summer camp. —How was your weekend? ---Pretty good, thanks —I worked as a guide at the Natural History Museum. —How interesting! 课后反思： Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 一、出示课题：Section A (Grammar Focus-3c) 二、第一次先学后教.（ Grammar Focus.） 1、出示学习指导。 1) 掌握以下单词：away, mouse, baby, shout ,shout at, woof, language. 2) 继续练习一般过去时态 2、先学。 （10） 让学生自己先读语法焦点，并找出语法结构。 老师将情态动词的 can 的用法，以学案的方式呈现在大屏幕上，让学生自主学习， 并发现其用法。 3、后教。 （1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 （11） 教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比， 区分语法结构上的变化。 （12） 教师讲解 can 后面的动词用动词原形部分人称变化。 4、当堂训练 Ⅱ. Grammar Focus. 1. 学生阅读 Grammar Focus 中的句子并完成下列填空题。 ① 上个周末你做了的什么事情？_____________________ ② 我做了我的家庭作业。___________________ 我们去划船了。___________________ ③ 谁去探望了她的奶奶？ ____________________ 是蓓基？___________________ ④上个周末她却了哪里?。 ___________________ 她去了农场。 _______________________ ⑤ 她和谁一起去的？ ____________________ 她和她的同学们一起去的。 _____________________________ 2. 学生们根据记忆完成句子，并自己校对答案。 3. Give Ss seven more time to remember the sentences. 4. 探究乐园： 一、一般过去时态的特殊疑问句 1. 特殊疑问词 + was/were + 主语+ 其他？ 上个周末你过得怎么样？ _______ _______ your last weekend? 2. 特殊疑问词+ did + 动词原形+ 主语+其他？ 昨天他做了什么事情？ _____ ____ he do yesterday? （二）、第二次先学后教.（补充句子） 1、出示学习指导。 能够独立完成填空题 3a-3b 2、先学。 1、让学生独立完成 Write questions and answer with the words and phrase.提醒学 生 but 的用法。 2、根据单词提示选单词，补充完整句子。 3、后教。 1）、教师公布答案看谁做对的最多，分析出学生对题掌握的程度。 2）教师把重要的语法结构写在黑板上，让学生学会思考，并做对比，区分语法 结构上的变化。 3）能掌握以下句型： —What did you do last weekend? —I did my homework. —Who visited her grandma? —Becky did. —Where did she go last weekend? —She went to a farm. —Who did she go with? （13） —She went with her classmates. 4、当堂训练。 练一练： 对下列句子中的划线部分提问。 1. I got up at nine yesterday morning. _____ ______ you get up yesterday morning? 2. We did our homework last night. ______ ______ you _______ last night? 3. They were in the supermarket last Sunday. ______ _______ they last Sunday? 4. My last weekend was kind of boring. ______ _____ your last weekend? 5. Linda took a walk with her parents after dinner. _____ ____ Linda take a walk with after dinner? Do the exercise with the Ss. Check the answer together. . Practice 1. Look at 3a. Tell Ss to fill in the blanks with who, what, where or how. Make the students finish the sentences by themselves. 2. Check the answers. 1 What , Who, 2 How, Where 3. What, Who. 3. Say, Now practice asking and answering questions like this about what the people did over the weekend. Practice in pairs Help students find partners. Then say, First read the dialogue together. Both students read both parts. . Practice 1. Look at 3b. Tell Ss to complete the passage with the correct forms of the words in the box. Pay attention to the right sentence structure. Ss work by themselves. 2. Check the answers. Answers: saw, was, climbed , ran away, said. 3. Ask several students tell the story in front of the class. 2. Make some conversations by yourself. 板书设计 Section B 1a-2c 1、出示课题：Section B 1a-2c 2、第一次“先学后教”：（认读词汇、记汉语意思和校正发音。） （1）、出示学习指导 ) 能掌握单词：（能做到四会） fly, kite, fly a kite. （2）、先学。 1、学生根据自己掌握的语音知识，认读英语单词并记住汉语意思。 2、学生听单词录音，画出自己读错的或不会读的单词。 （3）、后教。 教师播放单词录音，学生跟读，校正自己的发音，对于难以记忆的单词，教师 Section A Grammar Focus-3c What did you do last weekend? I did my homework. Who visited her grandma? Becky did. Where did she go last weekend? She went to a farm. Who did she go with? She went with her classmates. 指导学生根据字母组合、发音要领寻找规律，进行记忆。有必要时教师写在黑板 上让学生记住并积累字母组合的发音。 （4）、当堂训练 1）、单词默写训练、开火车拼读单词训练。 Ⅱ. Presentation Work on 1a. Call attention to the pictures. Ask students to point to and use the past tense to describe as many of the activities as possible. Point to and describe any activities they can't describe. For example, I played the guitar. Point to the numbered activities described in the list. Name the activities and ask students to repeat each one, After that, ask students to match each numbered phrase with a picture by writing the letter of each picture in the blank in front of the correct phrase. As students work, move around the room answering questions as needed. Check the answers：1d ,2 c ,3 f ,4 e ,5a ,6 b. Ⅲ. Thinking Work on 1b: This activity provides reading practice using the target language. Draw pictures of the happy face and unhappy face on the board. Write the words fun under the happy face and the words not fun under the unhappy face. Ask students to name some activities they think are fun and some that are not fun. For example, a student might say studying for a test is not fun. Point out the happy face under the pictures in la. Say, He sang and played the guitar. It was fun. The happy face shows it was fun. Say, draw a happy face or an unhappy face for letters a, c, and a, Review the answers. Students may have different answers for some items- For example, went to the library may be fan for some students and not fun for others. 2、第二次“先学后教”：（听录音，理解课文大意） （！）、出示自学指导。 1）用最快的时间看听力部分，第一遍听完听力内容时做 2）仔细听录音能听懂录音内容并独立完成填序号题和填空题。 (2)、先学。 1、用自己喜欢的方式朗读课文，勾出不认识的短语和语法等。理解课文大意。 2、根据学情，适当增加或减少录音播放次数。 3、学生听录音，并回答浅层次问题。 （3）、后教。 1、教师公布答案，学生同桌改，教师统计结果。 2、积极鼓励后进生回答，出现问题学生更正。 3、难度较大通过讨论仍解决不了的问题，教师通过启发诱导进行点 拔解决。 （4）当堂训练。 Listening 1c This activity provides listening and writing practice using the target language. Call attention to the names Jim and Sally and the write-on lines under each name. Say, Now you are going to hear a conversation between Jim and Sally. They are talking about what they did over the weekend. Listen to the conversation and write what each person did. Play the recording the first time. Students only listen. Point out the sample answer, did her homework. Play the recording again. Ss listen and check their answers. Remind students that they can look back at earlier activities in this unit to get spelling help, if they wish. Ⅴ. Pairwork Work on 1d: Work on 1e: . Thinking Work on 2a: This activity provides writing and oral practice using the target language. Show some photos of animals on the screen. Ask the class to answer the questions 1. what kind of animal are you afraid of ? 2. Why? 3. Make a list. Ask students to say the words by themselves. 3、第三次“先学后教”（学生读默读或朗读课文，勾出不认识的单词、 短语及句句型，读后回答问题。） （1）、出示学习指导 1）学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2）画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 3）了解课文内容，回答老师提出的课文相关联的问题。 （2）、先学。 1、学生读短文，教师密切关注学生的自读情况，进行行间巡视。 2、画出不懂得语言点、表达方式和语法现象。 （3）、后教。 1）、学生自学后回答理解性问题。 2）、对学生不会的，通过启发诱导的方式让学生理解。 3）、学生难以理解的短语、句型或者语言点，适当点拔、举例、归纳等，并板书。 4）能掌握以下句型： —Did you go anything interesting last weekend? —Not really, but I visited my sister. —My sister finished high school two weeks ago. 5）. 情感态度价值观目标： 帮助学生对动物惧怕心理，鼓励学生学习自然知识。 教育学生合理安排作息时间，健康生活。。 （4）、当堂训练 1、口述课文内容。 2、分角色朗读课文。 3、围绕本节课讲的语法项目，设计当堂训练题目。 Reading Work on 2b: This activity provides reading practice using the target language. 1. Fast reading Read the article and find the answer to this question: What did they see near the fire the next morning? (They saw a snake sleeping near the fire) Ss read the article quickly and find the answers to this question. Then check the answers with the class. 2. Careful reading Read the article and find the answers to the questions on 71. Ss read the passage and find the answers to the questions. Check the answers. . Reading Work on 2c Read the instructions again, put the phrases in order according to the passage then use then to retell the story. 1. Ask the student to read the story in 2b again, put the sentences in order. 2. 阅读指导：（见课件部分） 3. Check the answer. Answer: 6 2 8 4 7 5 1 3 3. Ask the students retell the story using the phrases. Homework 1. Review the article in 2b. 2. Ask Ss. Write down your own last weekend. 板书设计： 课后反思： Section B 3a-Self Check 一、出示课题：Section B 3a-Self Check 二、第一次“先学后教”。（补充句子） （一）出示学习指导 （1）、复习一般过去时态的用法及动词的过去式。能正确叙述过去发生的事情。 （2）通过不同形式的练习题来练习谈论过去发生的事件。 （3）学会谈论自己节假日的活动。 （二）先学。 （1）根据单词提示学生独立完成填空题。 （2）比较难的题学生之间或者小组之间进行讨论完成任务。 （三）后教。 （1）教师公布答案，学生之间相互改作业。并且大家总结哪些题做得好而那些 题做得好。 （2）师加强对做错题型的讲解及训练。 （四）当堂训练 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision 1. Daily greeting. Section B 1a-2c sing-sang study –studied have –had go-went fly- flew swim-swam Did you go anything interesting last weekend? Not really, but I visited my sister. My sister finished high school two weeks ago. 2. Retell the article in 2b. 3. Review the vocabulary in this unit. Ⅱ. Presentation Show the picture in 3a, what can you see ? Ask the students to practice in pairs. Ⅲ. Practice This activity provides reading and writing practice using the target language. Point out the pictures and ask students to describe what they see. Answer any question. students may have about these or other vocabulary items. Write each new word on the board and discuss its meaning. Answer: did my homework, helped my mother, went to the library, played soccer, watched TV. 2、第二次“先学后教”（补充句子，写短文） （一）出示学习指导。 1、根据例题完成填空题 2、完成 3a 部分，组织语言把它写成短文。 （二）先学。 （1）先让学生独立完成 Self Check。 （三）后教。 （1）教师公布答案,看谁做的最好，并且让做得好的学生总结一下自己是怎么做 的这些题，或者说说自己的学习方法，帮助后进生，做到相互学习的好习惯 (2)写作格式及要求。 （4）、当堂训练 . Self Check1 1. Review the phrases in this unit, complete the phrases in self check 1.Ask students do the exercise by themselves, then check the answer. Answer: go out with friends fly a kite go for a walk milk a cow pick apples camp near the lake take photos study for a test 2. Use the phrases to make some sentences in recent past events. . Self Check 2 This activity provides reading and writing practice using the target language. 1. Make the students complete the conversation. Move around the room monitoring progress and giving language support as needed. 2. Check the answer. Answer : Where did you go? Who did you go with? What did you do? Did you learn anything? 2. Ask two students to perform the dialogue to the class. Homework 1. Review Section B. 2. Now write a travel diary .Imagine you are an American student on vacation in Beijing. Have students do the activity individually. Write on pieces of paper. Set it as written homework to be collected and marked. 板书设计： 课后反思： (人教版七年级下册) 教材分析 《Go for it》七年级下册共 12 个单元，加上复习单元 2 个，文化背景知识和学习策略等部分补充材料。 全书采取任务型语言教学模式，融汇话题、交际功能和语言结构，形成了一套循序渐进的生活化的学习程序。每 个单元都列出明确的语言目标，主要的功能项目与语法结构，需要掌握的基本词汇，并分为 A、B 两部分。A 部分 是基本的语言内容，B 部分是知识的扩展和综合的语言运用。每个单元还有 self check 部分，供学生自我检测本 单元所学的语言知识之用。它采用“语言的输入——学生的消化吸收——学生的语言输出”为主线编排的。通过 确定 language Goal,采用听、说、读、写，自我检测等手段，有效提高语言习得者的学习效率，有利于习得者的 语言产出，体现了以学生为主体的思想。 一、教学目标要求 A.Talking Topic 1．Where’s your pen pal from? 2.Where’s the post office? 3.Why do you like koalas? 4.I want to be an actor. Section B 3a-Self Check go out with friends fly a kite go for a walk milk a cow pick apples camp near the lake take photos study for a test Where did you go? Whom did you go with? What did you do? Did you learn anything? 5.I’m watching TV. 6.It’s raining! 7.What does he look like? 8.I’d like some noodles. 9.How was your weekend? 10.Where did you go on vacation? 11.What do you think of game shows? 12.Don’t eat in class. B.Structures: 1. Where questions with from; Where questions with live ;what questions 2. Where questions; Affirmative statements; prepositions of place 3. Why, what , where questions; Because…. ; adjectives of quality 4. What, where questions; present tense to want , to work; affirmative and negative statements 5. present progressive tense; Yes/No questions and short answers 6. Present progressive tense; How questions ; Yes/No questions and short answers 7. Present tense to wear; adjectives of general description 8. What questions ; Modal verb would 9. Simple past of regular and irregular verbs; How was your weekend? 10. Past tense of regular and irregular verbs ; was/were; How questions 11. Wh-questions; What do you think of….? 12. Imperatives; can for permission ;Modal have to C.Ability Objects Train students’ listening ,speaking, reading and writing skills Train students’ communicative sompetence 二、教学重难点 1.Where questions with from; Where questions with live ;what questions 2.Where questions; Affirmative statements; prepositions of place 3.adjectives of quality 4.present progressive tense; Yes/No questions and short answers 5.Present tense to wear; adjectives of general description 6.Simple past of regular and irregular verbs; How was your weekend? 7.Past tense of regular and irregular verbs ; was/were; 三、教学目的 培养学生对英语的学习兴趣，形成有效的学习策略，有效提高学习效率，发展双基能力，培养听、说、读、写的 能力，使学生初步获得运用英语的能力，达到语言运用能力的迁移和拓展。 四、教学措施和方法 措施：培养学习兴趣，引导学生掌握正确的学习方法和策略，提高学习效率；发挥学生主体和教师主导作用：用 良好的师生关系，协调课堂气氛，培养学生开口说英语的勇气和信心；引导学生实现语言的迁移，加强日常生活 中英语口语的运用；鼓励学生自主探索，合用探究，共同提高。 1、加强词汇教学。包括单词拼写，词义记忆，语用功能的训练，在平常的教学中一定要常抓不懈。词汇是文章、 句子的基本单位，词汇量的大小，将直接关系到学生能否流利地运用英语进行交际；能否熟练地用英语读和写； 能否顺利地用英语思考。从去冬期末考试所反映的问题看，在今后的教学中，在加强拼读与拼写的同时，应帮助 学生进行有意识记，应加强对词的用法及内在含义的理解，要培养学生用英语解释单词的能力，逐步启发引导学 生用英语思考。单词教学一定要做到词不离句，这样，学生在学会了单词的同时，也学会了词的一些基本用法。 2、基本的语法教学一定要与语境相结合。进行语法操练时，要坚持“四位一体”，即话题、语境、结构、功能 相结合。抓住话题，联系语境，确定语法结构，明确语法功能（交际功能）。要重视语法知识对于培养语言运用 功能的基础作用，又要注重改革教法。课堂上一定要有生动活泼的教学活动。枯燥的题海战术已不能适应现今的 英语教学。 3、加强交际用语教学。用英语进行交际是英语教学的根本目标。在教学语言功能项目时，要尽量避免格式化， 不能限制学生的思维能力，要培养学生灵活运用语言的应变能力。 4、进一步培养阅读能力。阅读能力的培养是英语教学的又一重点。阅读能力的培养在于平时。教师在平时讲解 阅读理解题时，应着力帮助学生分析语言材料，而不是核对答案。 5、大力加强对新课程、新标准的学习和研究。我们在学习的过程中，必须抓住重点，理解英语课程的性质，把 握课程设计的基本理念。我们必须明白：英语课程的学习，既是通过英语学习和实践活动，逐步掌握英语知识和 技能，提高语言实际运用能力的过程；又是他们磨砺意志、陶冶情操、拓展视野、丰富生活经历、开发思维能力、 发展个性和提高人文素养的过程。 方法：任务型教学：教师提出指令，学生规范操作。听说领先，读写跟上。综合训练，扎实双基。 这学期主要通过任务型教学来训练学生的语言应用能力。任务型教学是从活动中获取知识。任务完成的过程， 就是一个知识转化的过程；运用已有的知识，通过小组活动，学到新的知识,即完成从陈述性知识到程序性知识 的转变。教师备课时重点考虑；如何设置一个合适的语言环境。这个大语言环境又是由各个小语言环境组成，其 中一部分是陈述性知识，另一部分则是程序性知识。教师的作用是指导学生通过活动把它们有机地联系起来，从 而完成了知识迁移过程。常用的训练活动有以下几项： （1）Daily report：值日生介绍自己、家庭成员或朋友的情况，其它学生可互相提问题，询问个人职业。 （2）Play a guessing game：用问题“what does he do？”引入任务，让学生猜测多媒体课件中人物的职 业，以此激发学生的学习兴趣，并训练学生的发散思维能力。 （3）Ask the way ：创设问路情景，根据实际情况 telling the way，eg， I want to go the hospital 完 成对话活动。 （4）See the doctor、go shopping 等：学生可扮演角色，进行对话。 （5）Have a discussion ：学生分小组讨论 （6）What do you want to be when you grow up？通过训练把课内的语言学习与课外的语言活动结合起来， 改变了过去老师一言堂的模式，变学生为主体，课堂主要是提供了一个学生获取知识的平台。学生在活动中主动 地获取知识。 五、教改打算 用新课标理念，结合新课标精神，进行课堂改革，实行教与学的互动。采用任务型语言教学模式，努力用一套行 之有效的课堂教学模式，提高教学效率。 六、课外活动 开展英语书写比赛，单词记忆比赛，看教学光碟，进行英语课外阅读活动。 七、教学计划安排。 本期每周 5 课时，预计十六个教学周。安排如下： 第 1——3 周： Unit 1——Unit 2 第 4 周：Unit 3 Why do you like koalas? 第 5 周：Unit 4 I want to be an actor 第 6 周：Unit 5 I’m watching TV 第 7 周：Unit 6 It’s raining! 第 8 周：复习 Unit 1——Unit 6 第 9 周：Unit 7 What does he look like? 第 10 周：Unit 8 I’d like some noodles 第 11 周：迎接半期考试 第 12 周：Unit 9 How was your weekend? 第 13 周：Unit 10 Where did you go on vacation? 第 14 周：Unit 11 What do you think of game shows 第 15 周：Unit 12 Don’t eat in class 第 16——18 周：复习迎接期末考试